JP2019080760A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 allows a determination performance for clearly expressing that a lottery result permits a shift to a jackpot game state in detection of presence of a movable accessory member 39 in a predetermined area in a front side of an image display part 341 by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d by execution of a chance-up performance in execution of the chance-up performance for increasing a degree of expectation that a lottery result of a jackpot lottery permits a shift to a jackpot game state by movement of the movable accessory member 39 from a standby position to an operation position during a touch operation reception period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, as one of the game effects accompanying the progress of the game, there is a game in which effects for operating a movable combination member called a gimmick are executed (for example, Patent Document 1) reference). Further, as a game effect, there is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by touching the front side of a liquid crystal display device in a game machine or the like within an operation reception period (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-136430 A Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-055786

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and to improve the player's willingness to play.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of interest and interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Determining means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
A gaming state transition means (41) for transitioning the gaming state between a notification gaming state in which a notification game for notifying a determination result by the determination means (41) is executed and the special gaming state;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
The first effect execution means is provided to execute a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). ,
The determination result in the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state by moving the movable part member (39) from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period. When the expectation degree improvement effect (chance up effect) for improving the degree of expectation of the game is executed, the expectation degree improvement effect is executed so that the movable combination in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) When the presence of the member (39) is detected, it is possible to execute a fixed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. I assume.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the jackpot gaming intention of the player by enhancing the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of a game board in case the movable role member of a game machine shown in FIG. 1 exists in a standby position. The front view which shows an example of a game board in case a movable role member is in an operation position. The front view which shows typically the detection range of each detection sensor of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing performed by a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the starting winning a prize process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed by a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the fluctuation game control processing executed with the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the fluctuation game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a touch operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a touch operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 22A shows an example of an operation data table showing the relationship between an operation detection pattern and an operation situation, and FIG. 22B shows a touch operation data table showing the relationship between a touch operation detection pattern and a touch operation situation The figure which shows an example. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 24 is a view showing an example of a table to be referred to when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23, and FIG. 24 (A) is a view showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table; The figure which shows an example of a fluctuation classification table. FIG. 24 is a view showing an example of an effect pattern type table that is referred to when a change pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23; The figure which shows an example of a movable role thing member operation | movement presentation. The timing chart which shows an example of an operation timing of a movable role thing member, and a touch operation reception period with an effect pattern. FIG. 24 is a view showing an example of a movable service member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable service member operation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 24 is a view showing an example of a movable service member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable service member operation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 24 is a view showing an example of a movable service member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable service member operation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of touch operation effect determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23; FIG. A figure showing an example of touch operation production. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation presentation selection table referred by the touch operation presentation determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation presentation selection table referred by the touch operation presentation determination process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a variable game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable role item member operation | movement process performed by the fluctuation game presentation process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production execution process performed by the fluctuation game production processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 40 (A) shows an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 (B) is a specific effect determination table of FIG. 40 (A) The figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect set. The front view which shows an example of a game board in case the movable part member of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention exists in a standby position. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 41. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the display part of the sub movable combination thing member of the game machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 46 (A) shows an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relation between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation situation, and FIG. 46 (B) shows the relation between the sub touch operation detection pattern and the sub touch operation situation The figure which shows an example of the sub touch operation data table which shows. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation presentation performed by the display part of a sub movable role thing member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation presentation performed by the display part of a sub movable role thing member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation presentation performed by the display part of a sub movable role thing member. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the sub movable service item member of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of change game effects performed with a game machine concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the main movable service item member of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the main movable service item member of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 7th embodiment of the present invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 7th embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the sub movable service item member of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of a movable service item operation timing selection table referred to in a movable service item operation timing determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of a game machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the fake action presentation effect of the movable service item member performed with the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 10th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 11th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 12th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 51 is a view showing an example of a continuous effect of a movable service member operation effect and a touch operation effect performed by a game machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 13th embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable service item operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine which concerns on 16th Embodiment of this invention. A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of touch operation production execution processing performed with a voice lamp control device of a game machine concerning a 16th embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, first to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are merely specific examples of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

First Embodiment
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 37, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Schematic Configuration of Game Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front and rear, right and left and upper and lower used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2 and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine provided with a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is an island facility (not shown) of the game hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as, for example, a toroidal gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a jinging ball gaming machine The present invention is applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Furthermore, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 as the left end portion is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of the pressing operation. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with operation and without operation) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is an operation on the operation button 20 by the player in a predetermined specific period in the fluctuation game effect (notification game effect) executed in the fluctuation game in which the player indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery to the player It is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like which is executed as a trigger.

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be an arbitrary position of the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate it. Also, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Furthermore, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of the operation by the player, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel may be provided in place of the operation button 20 to display a touch key and receive an operation by the player of the touch key. In addition, the operation button 20 may have a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing the gaming balls from the gaming ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

  The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored gaming balls in one row. It is used to lead to the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23, and is used to store gaming balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and the variation game effect processing (see step S1707 in FIG. 17 and FIG. 35) and the big hit game effect processing (see step S1708 in FIG. 17) The voice output effect to output the voice in etc. is executed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the electric decoration part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs lamp production by lighting modes, such as lighting or blink.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In addition, in FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and a movable part member 39 are provided.

  The inner rails 311 and the outer rails 312 are transport paths for delivering the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first operation opening 314, the second operating opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318 Be done.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321, a ball feed device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rails 321 are formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rails 311 and the outer rails 312 of the gaming board 31, and the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are attached to the inner rails 311 and the outer rails 312. It is what leads. The ball feeding device 322 has drive means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is drive means for causing the gaming ball supplied on the firing rail 321 to be fired toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is fired from the gaming ball firing mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launch mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for firing the game ball using another drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Referring back to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the general winning opening 313, the first operation opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings through the game board 31 in the front and rear direction. Is formed. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game balls can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. The ball entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 7) that can individually detect the game balls passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball 31 is hit to the right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

  The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of the gaming ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the ball entry of the game ball by another detection method.

  In addition, the second operation port 315 is provided with a motorized jack 315b for switching the presence or absence of the restriction of entering the second operation port 315 of the game ball. The electric role thing 315b is opened and closed by drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, when the electric character 315b opens, the game ball can enter the second operation port 315, and when the electric character 315b closes, the game ball enters the second operation port 315. The sphere is limited.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an open / close door 316 b for switching the presence or absence of restriction of entering the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The open / close door 316 b is opened and closed by drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening and closing door 316b enables the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening and closing door 316b closes the game ball entering the variable winning opening 316. Ru.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operation opening 314, the second operation opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered The number of winning balls in the case is 13 balls. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a big hit, it shifts to the big hit gaming state (special game state), and the below-mentioned round game (unit game) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times, 16 times), it is possible to expect a large amount of prize balls to be paid out.

  In addition, when the gaming ball wins in the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is winning, the game is shifted to a predetermined jackpot gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes the 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot gaming state, opening and closing execution is performed five times in a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time has elapsed or until a predetermined number or more of gaming balls have won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including a mode. The 16R probability variation big hit gaming state is a gaming state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and it can be expected to pay out more prize balls than the 5R jackpot gaming state, than the 5R jackpot gaming state It is a game state advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display portion 341, the symbol variation display and the variation game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 Various displays such as presentation effects are performed. In addition, the symbol display part 341 is an example of the image display means of this invention, and comprises the presentation means of this invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to provide one or more sub display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is disposed, for example, in the upper part or the lower part of the symbol display part 341, or in the left part or the right part. The sub display unit may be movable between a position covering the symbol display unit 341 and a position not covering the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be disposed on the upper tray 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display portion 341 is performed by, for example, sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numerals “1” to “9” in the longitudinal direction, the lateral direction, the oblique direction, and the like. In addition, other characters or sub-patterns such as a pattern may be displayed between the main patterns. Further, in the present embodiment, there is no sub symbol, and the types of main symbols are nine types of “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variation game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the lapse of the variation display time set in advance from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display portion 341 . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along the preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variations of the plurality of main symbols stop in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time passes, the symbol variation display is ended.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is finished, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged in one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the main symbol of the same symbol is displayed in the effective line, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by the combination of the main symbols in the effective line, but it is not necessarily clear. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777", for example, is set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols. Is displayed, or the combination of the same symbols other than "777" is displayed in a line of effective lines. Moreover, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", a state where symbol combinations such as "333" set in advance as symbol combinations showing the 5R probability variation big hit among the main symbols are arranged is displayed. The same symbol combination other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” or “333” is displayed in the effective line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, among the main symbols, it is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot, for example, other than a combination of symbols indicating a definite variation jackpot such as “222” or “444”. The state where the combination of the same pattern is lined up by the effective line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, a state (for example, “323” or “723” or the like) in which combinations of different main symbols are arranged in the effective line is displayed.

  Further, on the symbol display portion 341, in addition to the variable display of the main symbol in the variable game, the variable game effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is displayed. In addition, when the state where the jackpot symbol combination other than the combination of the main symbols showing the 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the active line is displayed when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, 5R probability variation jackpot as a variation game effect Or 5R indication suggestion is suggested to indicate that it is usually a jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the jackpot symbol combination other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot is displayed when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the 5R normal jackpot as a variation game effect is displayed. Suggestive rendition to indicate that is performed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to a big hit gaming state, a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an open / close execution mode effect, and an ending effect is displayed on the symbol display portion 341.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operation opening 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an action is made to illegally induce the game ball to the first operation opening 314 using a magnet, it is possible to detect the illegal action. The magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning opening 316. Thereby, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, when an action is made to make the variable winning opening 316 win a game ball which greatly exceeds the upper limit number, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 and on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. In this way, when an act is performed in which a radio wave is input to the ball entry sensor 314a, 315a illegally to cause the game ball to be falsely detected, it is possible to detect the fraud. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect, for example, radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two seven-segment displays 372, 373 and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 is triggered by a winning on the through gate 317, and the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the motorized part 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern). In the 7-segment display 372, the variable display of symbols is performed triggered by the winning of the first operation port 314, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display unit 373, the variable display of symbols is performed triggered by the winning of the second operation port 315, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N of pendings and the number M of pending variable displays generated by winning on the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 are displayed by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs.

  For the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, a player performs a touch operation on a specific area corresponding to the predetermined area in the panel 25 in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 by the player, for example. To detect the Further, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to the player's touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341 (a specific area of the panel 25), and hold the hand on the front side of the symbol display section 341 The action of the player may be detected. As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d include an upper left detection sensor 38a, a lower left detection sensor 38b, an upper right detection sensor 38c, and a lower right detection sensor 38d. Each detection sensor 38a to 38d is, for example, an optical sensor. The optical sensor may be either a reflective sensor or a transmissive sensor, but a diffuse reflective sensor is preferably used. When reflective sensors are used as the detection sensors 38a to 38d, the presence of an object in the detection range is detected based on, for example, changes in the amount of reflected light received.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6A, the upper left detection sensor 38a is disposed at or near the upper left portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341, and the lower left detection sensor 38b is at the lower left portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341. Alternatively, the upper right detection sensor 38c is disposed at or near the upper right portion of the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341, and the lower right detection sensor 38d is disposed at or near the lower right portion of the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341. It is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d have different ranges in which the presence of an object can be detected. When it is determined that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when an object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, cross hatching is performed in FIG. 6B. The presence of an object on the front side of substantially the entire area of the symbol display portion 341 can be detected. On the other hand, when it is determined that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the symbol subjected to cross hatching in FIG. The presence of an object on the front side of the central region of the display unit 341 can be detected.

  When it is determined whether or not an object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, an object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d from the size of the detection range of the object. It is preferable to determine that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display 341 when the symbol is detected. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 provided with a so-called warp, two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d are provided in order to prevent the game ball having passed through the warp from erroneously detecting that the player has performed a touch operation. It is more preferable to judge that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display section 341 on the condition that the presence of the object is detected by the. Also, as in the present embodiment, even when the movable combination member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position and covers the upper part of the symbol display portion 341, the two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d It is preferable to determine that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display 341 on the condition that the presence is detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it is determined that the object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

  Of course, when an object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it may be determined that the object is present on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. Moreover, while the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d when the movable role member 39 is in the standby position, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are detected when specific conditions are satisfied. The presence of an object may be detected by some of the sensors. For example, when the movable role member 39 is in the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the movable role member 39 has a position different from the standby position The presence of an object may be detected by a part of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d when they exist at an intermediate position with the operation position. In addition, when a part of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is broken, the presence of an object may be detected by the remaining detection sensors that are not broken down. In the operation check of the movable combination member 39 when the power is turned on, each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d individually determines whether or not the movable combination member 39 is in the operative position. A check can be made to see if 38a-38d have failed. Moreover, the operation | movement chuck | zipper whether each detection sensor 38a-38d is not broken can also be performed at the time of advancing of a game. For example, when the movable role member 39 is moved to the operation position, each detection sensor 38a determines whether an object exists based on the detection result of one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is also possible to perform an operation check as to whether or not each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is normally operated, by sequentially determining 〜38d.

  In addition, the detection sensors 38a to 38d may be disposed not only around the symbol display portion 341 but also at the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341 or the like. Furthermore, the number of detection sensors may be one or more, and may be four or more.

  The movable service member 39 is located between a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the symbol display portion 341 and an operation position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. It is movable in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display portion 341. The operation position (see FIG. 5) is a position closer to the center of the symbol display portion 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). When the movable part member 39 is in the operating position (see FIG. 5), the coverage of the surface of the symbol display 341 is higher than in the standby position (see FIG. 4). A plurality of lamps 391 are annularly arranged at the peripheral edge portion of the movable role member 39. In the present embodiment, fifteen lamps 391 are disposed, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off. In addition, each of the plurality of lamps 391 can be lit in multiple colors including, for example, white, yellow, green, red, or a mixture of these. In this way, each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off, and can be turned on in a plurality of colors, for example, the lighting pattern, lighting color, and the like of each lamp 391 when the movable combination member 39 is activated. Depending on the number of lights, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that has triggered the variable game, or to clearly indicate the lottery result. For example, with regard to the lighting color, the jackpot expectation can be made higher in the order of white, yellow, green and red, and by setting the lighting pattern and the lighting color appropriately, the rainbow lamp effect is performed It is also possible to execute a fixed effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, although the movable combination product member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position, the lottery result in the big hit lottery using the lamp 391 of the portion exposed from the opening 31A is a big hit It is also conceivable that an effect indicating the degree of expectation is to be executed. For example, in the present embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), the jackpot may be expected depending on which of the lamps 391 is turned on. It is possible to suggest a degree. In addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also conceivable to suggest a jackpot expectation by the image displayed on the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 26C described later).

  In addition, the movable combination product member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may have a plurality of movable role members 39. Furthermore, the movable part member 39 may be provided with a display such as a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, one that can be deformed into two or more forms, and a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable combination member 39 may cover not only a part of the display screen of the symbol display portion 341 but also the whole display screen. Further, the central portion of the movable part member 39 may be configured as an illuminated part that can be turned on and off. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting a jackpot expectation or clearly indicating a jackpot by lighting or blinking the electric decoration part (see FIG. 26D described later).

  Such a movable combination member 39 is controlled to operate in an effect or the like for showing the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game. In particular, the movable combination product member 39 is operated as a definite effect indicating that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, and is also operated as a chance-up effect for improving the expectation of the lottery result being a big win There are many things. In addition, in the jackpot game, for the jackpot game other than the promotion effect which clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the variable game effect in the jackpot game It is also possible to operate as a hold combination fixed effect which notifies that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit among the held games in which execution of the variable game is held is included.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 39a for supplying a driving force to the movable part member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable part member 39 is returned to the standby position. Have. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor or the like. The movable combination member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable combination member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operative position according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a. Downward, or upward from the operating position to the standby position. For example, the movable part member 39 is moved from the standby position to the actuating position by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and, conversely, stands by from the actuating position by rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction. Moved to position.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor driver 39c to which a motor 39a and a return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39 c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39 c controls the motor 39 a in accordance with the control instruction from the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39 c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39 b and can transmit the detection result to the audio lamp control device 5. The motor 39 a and the return detection unit 39 b may be directly connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the gaming balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a emission control device 8, and a power control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of payouts of the game ball by the payout device 132, and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to the jackpot gaming state set in advance. The main control device 4 has an MPU 41 and an input / output I / F 42 mounted thereon. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of a main control unit of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 incorporates a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the main control device 4 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display unit 37, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42. Then, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general prize port 313, the first operation port 314, the second operation port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 are entered. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity using a magnet or a radio wave based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, to the input / output I / F 42, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, the power control device 9, etc. are connected.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command to the voice lamp control device 5.

  The fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time and the lottery result in the big hit lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the big lottery is the big hit. When the variation pattern command starts symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 and the main display section 37, step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later. It is set in. The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the variation pattern, and the hold pattern N when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M. The first holding command and the second holding command are set based on the information stored in the holding storage area 412b described later, when there is an increase in the number of holdings N or the number of holdings M (see FIG. 12). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process).

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 when the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

  In addition, although commands other than the above-mentioned command may be output to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 5 from the main control apparatus 4, those description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, an oscillation circuit, a frequency divider circuit, and the like are also mounted on the main control device 4 as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency that has been determined in advance, and the divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process described later executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the divider circuit.

  In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the main timer division described later is generated each time the MPU 41 generates a rise (or fall) of the clock signal. It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillation circuit and the divider circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock of the control subject in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used to set a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery and the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the fluctuation display time, etc., using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the suspension storage area 412b and the electric power suspension area 412c of the RAM 412.

  In the lottery counter 412a, there are a big hit random number counter C1 used for big hit winning lottery, a big hit type counter C2 used when determining a big hit type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining an out type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 that determines the fluctuation display time in the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341. Be Further, the random number counter C4 used in the lottery for whether or not the motorized combination 315b of the second operation port 315 is set to the electronic combination release state and the initial value setting of the normal random number counter C4 in the lottery counter 412a. And an initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are added to the previous value by 1 at short intervals by the MPU 41 and used as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 at the time of setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display time.

  The pending storage area 412b includes a first pending storage area REA, a second pending storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserve storage area REA includes a first reserve area REA1, a second reserve area REA2, a third reserve area REA3, a fourth reserve area REA4, and a reserve count storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first suspension storage area REA, and the type of the variable game displayed by the 7-segment display 372 as the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game is there. The second reserve storage area REB includes a first reserve area REB1, a second reserve area REB2, a third reserve area REB3, a fourth reserve area REB4, and a reserve count storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserve storage area REB, and the type of the change game in which the 7-segment display 373 performs the change display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game is there.

  When the game ball enters the first operation port 314, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit It is acquired as the success or failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA. When the game ball enters the second operation port 315, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit It is acquired as the success or failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. Acquisition processing of the success or failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (such as a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a change type counter CS1) is individually provided for each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the REA 4 and the second reserve storage area REB.

  Therefore, execution is performed based on the pass / fail information stored in the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA and the second reserve storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation game played, it is possible to judge in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol fluctuation display displayed on the symbol display section 341.

  Specifically, when the game ball enters the first operation opening 314, the acceptance information is free in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3 and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the The number of holdings of the pass / fail information among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 is stored as the holding number N in the number-of-holdings storage area NAA.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the second operation opening 315, the pass / fail information is vacant at the priority of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holdings storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the pass / fail information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operation port 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of success or failure information of the game ball to the second operation opening 315 as the winning history of the game ball.

  In addition, it is also considered as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315, and in this case, a maximum of eight in total. It is possible to hold the pass / fail information as the winning history. Storage processing of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. Storage area used to move the pass / fail information stored in Specifically, the priority information of the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the information does not exist in the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. When the number-of-retentions storage area NAB is 0, the pass / fail information of the first storage area REA1 of the first storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of storage area NAA of the first storage area REA and the number N of storage areas stored in the number of storage area NAB of the second storage area REB is 2 or more In this case, it may be considered as another embodiment that the value of the larger number of holding areas is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  And MPU41 performs a big hit lottery etc. based on the numerical information memorized as success or failure information in execution area AE at the start of one change game. At this time, when the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second reserve area REA2 is shifted to the first reserve area REA1, and the third reserve area REA1 The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 is shifted to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 is shifted to the third hold area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second reserve area REB2 is shifted to the first reserve area REB1, and the third reserve area REB1 The pass / fail information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reserve area REB2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth reserve area REB4 is shifted to the third reserve area REB3.

  For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one turn, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the large hitting random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  The random number that will be the jackpot win is the low probability mode (the first notification game state) that is the normal gaming state and the high probability mode (the second probability game state that is the probability variation gaming state) Two types are set corresponding to the notification game state). Here, FIG. 9A is a view showing a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 9B is a view showing an example of the high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the big win in the low probability mode is two out of the random numbers 0 to 637 (0, 1) In the high probability mode, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot is 20 (0 to 19) of the random number 0 to 637. That is, the jackpot probability is 1/319 (2/638) in the low probability mode, and the jackpot probability is 1 / 31.9 (20/638) in the high probability mode, which is 10 times the low probability mode.

  Here, in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, although two random numbers (0, 1) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit are common, it is conceivable that they are not common. In addition, the random number for winning a jackpot may not be a continuous value, but may be a value in which part or all is discrete. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19 and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types of the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers to be 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers to be 16R probability variation jackpot Is 5 to 10-14, and the number of random numbers to be normally hit by 5R is 5 to 15-19. On the other hand, when the type of the variation game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers to be 5R probability variation jackpot is 0 to 4 and the number of random numbers to be 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 to 5 There are five random numbers of 15R to 19R which are usually 5R. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability variation machine in which the probability of the probability variation jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol. That is, compared with the normal gaming state such as the normal short time gaming state or the normal non-short time gaming state, the probability change time short game state is set higher than the expected expectation value of the game ball when the lottery result in the big hit lottery becomes the big win ing.

  In the present embodiment, a first operation port 314 that triggers execution of the first special symbol game by winning a game ball, and a second operation port that triggers execution of a second special symbol game by a game ball winning. Although an individual distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 the game ball has won, the first special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the game and the second special symbol game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a single type two-mixer machine, or the like.

  Then, based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 has a lottery result in the big hit lottery “5R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, “5R normal It is determined which of the "big hit" and the "out".

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of the 5R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit, transition to the high probability mode with high probability of winning the jackpot after the end of the jackpot game and high probability support mode with high probability of opening the motorized character 315b. Then, the probability variation time short mode continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, it is executed in the normal time saving mode which is the low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low after the end of the jackpot game and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the motorized jack 315b is high. Then, the high-frequency support mode in the normal time short mode continues until, for example, 50, 100, etc. preset rounds of the jackpot lottery end.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability machine, after the end of the jackpot game at the time of the probability change jackpot, the jackpot lottery of a preset number of times Is executed in the probability variation time short mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and then shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a fall lottery from the probability variation time short mode to the normal time short mode or the low probability mode in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 will be described by way of an example in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation, 16R probability variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpots, 16R regular jackpots.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display portion 341 when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out. Specifically, the out-of-classification table stored in the out-of-classification table storage area in the ROM 411 causes the last stop symbol to be shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and to stop after the reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of out-of-reach except reach and out-of-front out which the final stop symbol stops except in front and behind of the reach symbol and reach which does not occur. Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of the outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (D), the values of the random numbers for reaching back and forth are 0 to 8, the values for random numbers for reaching other than back and forth are 9 to 38, and the value of random numbers for completely out is 39 ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variation jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, ie, a variation game transitioning to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, "reach" indicates a state in which it is likely to become a symbol combination of main symbols indicating that a jackpot has been won between the start of variation display of symbols in symbol display portion 341 and the stop display of symbols. Is a fluctuating condition. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line in the symbol display portion 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a state of variation. In addition, during the fluctuation state of reach in the symbol display section 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest an expectation degree, an operation on the operation button 20 by the player, or a specific area of the panel 25. A player participation type operation effect process or the like in which the touch operation is reflected in the effect is executed. In addition, during execution of these rendering processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 becomes non-display, and that the variable display is displayed by being reduced or enlarged.

  For example, the motor-operated workpiece release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the hold combination area 412c of the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether the electric combination 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the combination holding area 412c. For example, it can be considered that the winning is obtained when the motorized product release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the motor is released when the motorized product release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed in the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. As described above, by determining the change pattern type, in the voice lamp control device 5, high-speed change effects (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect (first development effect), super reach effect (second development effect) A rough change game effect type such as special reach effect (second development effect) is determined according to a change pattern type (change display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once by the MPU 41 every time the main process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table set in advance. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability fluctuation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 9 (E), FIG. 9 (F) and FIG. 9 (G) are diagrams showing an example of the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, and the deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIG. 9 (E), FIG. 9 (F) and FIG. 9 (G), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table and the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is previously made according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. And MPU41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the normal jackpot variation table, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery If the result is "out", the out-of-variation table is referred to, and the type of fluctuation pattern is specified.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9E and 9F, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. One of the two is selected. Here, when the fluctuation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the fluctuation display time is 30 s as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24B). In the symbol display portion 341, a normal reach effect pattern is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). When the fluctuation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern having a fluctuation display time of 60 seconds as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24B). In the symbol display portion 341, a super reach effect pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect (see FIG. 27). Further, when the fluctuation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern having a fluctuation display time of 90 seconds as the fluctuation type (rendering pattern type) (see FIG. 24B). The special reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341). The special reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect (see FIG. 27).

  As shown in FIG. 9 (G), in the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected for each stop type (reach before and after reach, reach other than back and forth, complete exit) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the and the fluctuation patterns is defined. More specifically, in the case where the stop type at the time of removal is a reach other than the front-rear outreach or the front-back out-of-front, any of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the type of stop at the time of out is completely out, either of the change patterns “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the change type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the fluctuation display time is 7s is determined as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type) in the voice lamp control device 5 (FIG. 24) (Refer to (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341 (refer to FIG. 27). Further, when the fluctuation pattern “05” is selected, the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a fluctuation display time of 10 s is determined as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type) in the voice lamp control device 5 (FIG. 24) (Refer to (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341 (refer to FIG. 27).

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of disconnection corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "04", the fluctuation display is out without accompanying the notice effect such as a character, a message, etc. Is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of movement corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", the fluctuation display is out with the notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, etc. To be executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of detachment corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", the player participation type operation effect is reflected that the operation of the touch operation on the specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 by the player is reflected. It may be implemented as a production.

  In addition, the classification of a fluctuation pattern is not limited to the example shown in Drawing 9 (E)-Drawing 9 (G). In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", and any one of them is selected. A normal reach effect is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect to be executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared, and it is selected from among them One of the super reach effects performed is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach production, and the probability (expected degree) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big win than the normal reach production is high, and a big hit is elected than the special reach production It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (the degree of expectation) is low.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared, and it is possible to select from among them Any of the special reach effects that have been The special reach effect is a reach effect whose fluctuation time is longer than that of the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, the normal reach effect or the super reach effect. Special reach production is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expected degree) of winning a big hit is higher than that of normal reach production or special reach production.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation situation for the touch operation on the specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a one-shot operation in which a one-shot operation is reflected in the effect Player participation type operation effects such as a continuous hit operation effect in which a continuous hit operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect May be included.

  Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot” preceded with the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. One of A01 "to" A03 "is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 has a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. -Output one of "B03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 has a variation pattern command “C01” attached with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Output one of "C03". Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 changes pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" indicating that it is out of the movement patterns "01" to "05". Output one of the Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display portion 341 is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the fluctuation mode, such as the fluctuation type and the effect type, displayed in are determined. Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to perform variable display on the basis of the determined details of the change mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights the electric decoration 27 and blinks. , Turn off.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining a fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for fluctuation display in the symbol display portion 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. In addition, since the details of the fluctuation mode actually displayed on the symbol display portion 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various fluctuation modes as the fluctuation mode.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control unit 332 includes the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol variation display in the symbol display portion 341 and Execute effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 incorporates a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used for fluctuating game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like, and lamp blink patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 causes the MPU 51 to execute a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511, whereby a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electric decoration 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the big hit game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control unit 4 to the voice lamp control unit 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  Further, the speaker 26, the electric decoration portion 27, and the motor driver 39c are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. The MPU 51 can also operate the movable part member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) by controlling the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c, and acquires the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether the movable role member 39 has returned to the standby position. Further, the operation switch 20a, the upper left detection sensor 38a, the lower left detection sensor 38b, the upper right detection sensor 38c, and the lower right detection sensor 38d are connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20 and that a touch operation has been performed on a specific area of the panel 25, and based on the detection result, the symbol display unit It is also possible to control an image game effect performed in 341, an operation effect of the movable combination member 39, an audio output effect in which a sound is output from the speaker 26, a lamp effect by a blinking mode of the electric decoration 27 and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 changes the fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbol, fluctuation display time, fluctuation type (see FIG. 24B)) based on the fluctuation pattern command, and The effect type (see FIGS. 25A to 25C) is determined, and the display change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S2203 to S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23). Refer to S2207), and start symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the deviation. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command indicates 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when 5R positive variation jackpot is shown, a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R normal jackpot or 5R positive variation jackpot If is displayed, and indicates 16R probability variation jackpot 5R normal jackpot,

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Note that bi-directional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 incorporates a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit that counts time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. In addition, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, besides the control program, fluctuation symbols such as main symbols used in symbol fluctuation display of the symbol display portion 341, notice effect image, reach effect image, big hit effect image, off effect image, touch operation reception effect image, touch A plurality of types of images such as operation effect images are stored. The image displayed on the symbol display portion 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes, in addition to the type and timing of the image to be used, the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays an image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol change display and the effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the gaming balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a driving unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopper for switching the presence or absence of the gaming balls. And a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the gaming balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of gaming balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state recovery switch 73. The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed on an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money and to lend it to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71, and the predetermined number of gaming balls are displayed. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Projection control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the gaming ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 are fired the rail 321 Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31 Launch it. At this time, the emission control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched on / off in a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the discharge handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is inputted to the discharge control IC 81 in accordance with the amount of rotational operation of the discharge handle 22. As a result, the firing control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the gaming ball from the gaming ball firing mechanism 32 as the rotation manipulation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation manipulation amount of the firing handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

  Further, the release handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the release handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to optionally stop the release of the game ball. Is provided. When the release control IC 81 detects that the player does not touch the release handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a using the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player When it is detected, the game ball launch mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotating state, and a game is prevented in a situation where the player does not touch the launch handle 22. Also, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control unit 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12 V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers and the like, +5 V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erase switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 91 ON.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means to be charged by the power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power control unit 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control unit 4, the voice lamp control unit 5, the payout control unit 7 or the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a DC voltage of 24 V set in advance based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than 22 V set in advance. I will judge. When the power failure signal is received from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. interrupt the control being executed and execute predetermined NMI interrupt processing.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is activated at power-on, main processing executed after activation, main timer interrupt processing periodically activated, executed at power failure Execute NMI interrupt processing etc. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any one of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, respectively, and the counter values reach the maximum value. In the case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process in accordance with the winning of the gaming ball in the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the firing control process, the game ball is detected on the condition that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the touch sensor 21a detects it and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the shooting is not operated. Processing to activate the launch of Further, the release control process invalidates the release of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the release handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. Processing. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the through-gate draws the MPU 41 whether or not to set the motorized combination 315b of the second operation port 315 to the combination release state based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the combination storage area 412c. Execute the process Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines, based on the high frequency mode flag, whether the current game mode is the high frequency support mode. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning pattern is won when the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when the high frequency support mode is not set, and the MPU 41 is out of the case when the normal random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is determined that Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning pattern is won when the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and is out of the case where the normal random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is determined that When the MPU 41 determines that the symbol is normally won in the through gate process, the MPU 41 opens the motorized product 315b only for a predetermined time. As a result, winning of a game ball to the second operation port 315 on the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric role thing 315b is juxtaposed is possible.

[Start winning process]
Here, the start winning process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming ball has won in the first operation opening 314 or not. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has won the first operation opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the first operation opening 314 Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending count N stored in the pending count storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending count (four in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings N is the maximum number of holdings (step S1102: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. And S1310), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reserved area among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the contents of the pass / fail information before the pass / fail information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the determination target of the jackpot in the variation start process (S1408 in FIG. 14, FIG. 16) described later. A confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process of setting a first hold command in the RAM 412 based on the check result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming ball has won in the second operation opening 315 or not. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has won the second operation opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the second operation opening 315 Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending count M stored in the pending count storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending count (four in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: YES), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of holdings M is not the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: NO), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of holdings M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 10, and the change type counter CS1 updated in main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. And S1310), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pass / fail information for the second hold obtained in step S1109 becomes the determination target of the jackpot in the variation start process (S1408 in FIG. 14, FIG. 16) described later. The contents are confirmed, and a second hold command setting process of setting a second hold command in the RAM 412 based on the check result is executed. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 12, the detailed description will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 12, if “first hold command” is replaced with “second hold command” and “hold number N” is replaced with “hold number M” Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the number N of holds. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of reservations N from the number of holdings storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is selected. If the high probability mode is selected (step S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the high probability mode is not selected (step S1202) : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 13) in the main processing described later, whether or not the high probability mode is The determination is made based on the high probability mode flag set to off at the time of transition to another gaming state such as the state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win based on the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 9B). Execute the pass / fail judgment of On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win based on the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 9A). Execute a pass / fail judgment of no.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the big hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206 and the big hit random number counter C1. When it is determined that the counter value read out from is not the value corresponding to the big hit (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the pass / fail information is stored in the third reserve area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 11, the counters of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the pass / fail information stored in the third reserve area RE3. The value is read. Of the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4, the reserve area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 11 can be determined by the value of reserve number N stored in reserve number storage area NA is there.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of holdings N in the first holding command. As described above, since the first holding command includes the number N of holdings read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first holding command includes the number of holdings included in the first holding command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize in which of the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 the relevant first reserve command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N as the first suspension command (step S1209).

  The first hold command set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other hold command is executed in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. 13 described later executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. After being sent to the voice lamp control unit 5 with the command of. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and it is not limited to the one described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first pending command may be included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing for the progression of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, for example, and the counter updating processing of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, and the like. Then, if a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a change game control process for controlling the game in the change game. In addition, although the details of the change game control process will be described later, in the change game control process, the above-mentioned big hit lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 changes the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10, and the fluctuations updated in step S1302 and step S1310 of this processing. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progression of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the open / close door 316b in the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, thereby causing the transition to the jackpot game result of the jackpot lottery (big hit Execute only the number according to the type). For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times if the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times if the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes gaming state transition processing for shifting the gaming state, based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in steps S1602 and S1603 in the change start processing of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 determines the gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state having the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability variation time short game state which is the high probability mode, the low probability mode and the high frequency It shifts to the normal short game state which is the support mode, and the non-short time game state which is not the high probability support mode and the low probability mode.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the change game notifying the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the big hit game is over, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the big hit gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery that triggered the execution of the big hit game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation time short game state after the end of the big hit game, and the lottery result in the big hit lottery is 5R normal hit If it is, after the end of the jackpot game transition to the normal time short game state.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is transitioned, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probable short time gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to OFF while setting the high probability mode flag to ON. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probable short time gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to off while the big hit gaming flag is set to on.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the symbol variation display is executed only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command by the 7 segment displays 372, 373 in the main display unit 37, and the symbol variation display is a symbol showing the lottery result It will be displayed stop. Further, by the display control processing, each LED lamp is blinked only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time by the LED pair 371 in the main display section 37, and the presence or absence of the normal symbol winning is turned on and off of the pair of LED lamps. It is indicated by the lighting pattern which is a combination of In addition, in the case of the normal symbol winning, the motorized product 315b attached to the second operation port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has come (step S1308: Yes), it shifts the processing to step S1301, and executes the above-described processing of S1301 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not arrived (step S1308: No), it waits until the execution timing of the next main processing arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main processing. Steps S1308, S1309, and S1310 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (S1308: Yes).

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Fluctuation game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 13 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a big hit game, and if it is in a big hit game (step S1401: Yes), the variation game control process is ended and the big hit game is not in progress. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to ON at the transition to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition processing in the main processing of FIG. 13, for example, and is set to OFF at the transition from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state It is judged based on the big hit game flag.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not symbol variation display is in progress, and if symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the variation game control The determination is made based on the variable display flag set to off in step S1405 of the process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and if it is determined that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the fluctuation game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: YES), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variation game ( Step S1404) The variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (Step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the suspension storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the fluctuation game control process. On the other hand, when one of the pending number N and the pending number M is not 0 (No at step S1406), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing on the data of the pass / fail information stored in the pending storage area 412b. When the processing of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display portion 341 to perform variation display based on the success or failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variation game control processing. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502 Do. On the other hand, when the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: YES), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the number of holdings area NAA (step S1502), and from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success or failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserve area REA2 to the fourth reserve area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4 is Move the pass / fail information to the third reserve area REA3. When the processing of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 proceeds when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 proceeds when both or one of the number of reservations M and the number of reservations N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and thus executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts one from the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the pass / fail information from the first pending area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserve area REB2 to the fourth reserve area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second reserve area REB2 is moved to the first reserve area REB1, and the pass / fail information of the third reserve area REB3 is moved to the second reserve area REB2, and the fourth reserve area REB4 is The success or failure information is moved to the third reserve area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the pass / fail information of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 has shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the reservation symbol displayed on symbol display part 341 will be changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Change start process]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether it is the high probability mode or not is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to on in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 13 is set to on. . When the gaming state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low probability mode If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 sets the counter of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the pass / fail information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b based on the high probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 9B). Whether the value is a value corresponding to a big hit is determined. On the other hand, in step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the acceptance information AE stored in the hold storage area 412b based on the low probability mode acceptance table (see FIG. 9B). Whether or not the counter value of is a value corresponding to a big hit is judged.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation game to the fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is usually a large jackpot, the MPU 41 changes the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 9E). Identify. In addition, when the result of the judgment of success or failure in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9F). . Furthermore, the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 9 (G)) when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is out of order.

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main processing (refer to FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays symbols based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display or the like by the unit 341 is executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the lottery result is “normal win”, the MPU 41 “A01” to “A” indicating “A” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R normal wins. "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 any of “B01” to “B03” in which “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are the 16R probability variation jackpot Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that the fluctuation patterns “01” to “08” are off. Set in the RAM 412 as a command. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes, in the fluctuation pattern command, information as to whether it is the front or back reach, the reach other than the front or back, or the complete out.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol fluctuation display on the main display unit 37, and ends the fluctuation start processing. When the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started, the MPU 41 sets the variation display flag to ON.

[Process of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the electric decoration portion 27, start processing at the start of the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, etc. The description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the auxiliary timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process of 1 msec cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), touch operation detection processing (step S1703), touch operation detection pattern in the sub timer interrupt processing. A determination process (step S1704), a counter update process (step S1705), a command determination process (step S1706), a fluctuation game effect process (step S1707), and a jackpot game effect process (step S1708) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories is executed. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the operation of the operation button 20 is performed at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of will be determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. In step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. Thereafter, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation button operation detection processing ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, by performing the processes of steps S1801 to S1803, the operation states for the last three 1-msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are the first operation detection flag to third It is stored in the RAM 512 as an operation detection flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of the on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. When only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is not performed.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1902, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to on. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1903. When the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued when the operation pattern of “on”, “on”, and “on” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. The first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines that the first operation detection flag is off in step S1901 (step S1901: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the process is performed. It transfers to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1907, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “off”, “on”, “on” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation Since the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 is started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, false detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines that the second operation detection flag is off in step S1902 (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1910, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “on”, “off”, “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation Since the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times are reflected. Alternatively, false detection of the start of the operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as “off”, “off”, “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 22A). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Touch operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection process, based on the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the touch operation state on a predetermined area (a specific area in the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display section 341 is detected. A process for sequentially updating the touch operation history for the past three times with respect to a predetermined area on the front side (a specific area of the panel 25) (for example, the cross hatched portion in FIG. In the gaming machine 10, when the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the front surface of the symbol display portion 341 is formed at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of the touch operation by the player with respect to the predetermined area on the side (the specific area in the panel 25) is determined.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second touch operation detection flag to the first touch operation detection flag. In step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third touch operation detection flag to the second touch operation detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the detection result of the presence of the object detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in the third touch operation detection flag, and the touch operation detection process ends. For example, when the presence of an object is detected in all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 has an object in a specific area (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341) on the panel 25 It is determined that the player has touched). Conversely, when the presence of an object is not detected in one or more of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 detects an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area in the panel 25). Is determined to be absent (the player has not performed a touch operation).

  As described above, in the touch operation detection process, by performing the processes of steps S2001 to S2003, the touch operation history with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specific area in the panel 25) Three touch operation states are stored in the RAM 512 as a first touch operation detection flag to a third touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as the third touch operation detection flag, the touch operation state immediately before is stored as the second touch operation detection flag, and the second touch operation is detected as the first touch operation detection flag. The operation state is stored.

[Touch operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection pattern determination process, a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is determined from the touch operation history determined based on the first touch operation detection flag, the second touch operation detection flag, and the third touch operation detection flag. A touch operation pattern flag is set to determine the touch operation state with respect to the specific region in (25). The touch operation pattern flag includes first to third touch operation pattern flags, and a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area in the panel 25) by the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags on and off It is possible to determine the touch operation state for. For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, when only the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, a touch operation on a predetermined area (a specific area in the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is performed. Can be determined as continuing. When only the second touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) is started. When only the third touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area in the panel 25) is finished. Then, when all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to off, it is determined that the touch operation is not performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area in the panel 25). it can.

<Steps S2101 to S2105>
As shown in FIG. 21, in steps S2101 to S2105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first touch operation detection flag for the touch operation detection processing that is two steps ahead is set to ON, and the touch operation detection process that is one before It is determined whether the second touch operation detection flag for is set to ON, and whether the third touch operation detection flag for the latest touch operation detection processing is set to ON.

<Steps S2107 to S2110>
In steps S2107 to S2110, the MPU 51 determines the first to third touch operation pattern flags based on the determination result of whether the first to third touch operation detection flags in steps S2101 to S2105 are on. Set to on or off.

  Specifically, in step S2107, the MPU 51 turns on the second touch operation pattern flag, turns off the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. . That is, the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern of “off”, “on”, or “on” as a touch operation state for three times on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area in the panel 25). Since it can be determined that the touch operation state has been changed from the non-touch operation state to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specific area in the panel 25) (the touch operation has been started), the second touch operation pattern flag It is set to ON, and the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22 (B)).

  In step S2108, the MPU 51 turns on the first touch operation pattern flag, turns off the second touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the touch operation pattern of “on”, “on”, “on” is generated as the operation state for three times with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specific area in the panel 25), the MPU 51 Since it can be determined that the touch operation state on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (the specific area on the panel 25) is continuing, the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second touch operation pattern flag The third touch operation pattern flag is set to off (see FIG. 22 (B)).

  In step S2109, the MPU 51 turns on the third touch operation pattern flag, turns off the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the touch operation pattern of “on”, “off” or “off” is generated as the touch operation state for three times on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specific area in the panel 25) Since it can be determined that the touch operation state for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) has changed to the non-touch operation state (the touch operation has ended) The first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B).

  In step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag, the second touch operation pattern flag, and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern other than the above such as “off”, “off”, “off” as the touch operation state for three times on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specific area in the panel 25). In this case, all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to off (see FIG. 22B). When all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is in a non-touch state.

Counter update process
Here, returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, in the counter updating process (step S1705), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the fluctuation display counter, the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, the specific effect type counter, etc. Run. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the effect pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the change type and the effect type based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts one from the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display counter is for counting the fluctuation display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp that the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display portion 341 is finished, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first to fourth touch operation effect type counters updated here are a touch on a predetermined area (a specific area in the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It is used to determine the type of touch operation effect performed by the operation. For example, the first touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 39, and the second touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 59, and the third touch operation effect type The counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79, and the fourth touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the specific effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The specific effect type counter updated here is the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4 during execution of super reach effect or special reach effect It is used to determine a specific effect type to be executed instead of the touch operation effect when the is detected. For example, the specific effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99.

Command judgment processing
In the command determination process (step S1706), in the command determination process, the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed in step S1706 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2201: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (Step S2201: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines the presence or absence of reception of the command by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to be received in step S2201 and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes the target of processing, for example, in the processing work storage area. It is memorized.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2203 when it is a variation pattern command (step S2202: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S2206 when the received command is not a variation pattern command (step S2202: No).

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 24A) and the variation type table (see FIG. 24B) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the RAM 512. Based on the counter value of the effect pattern type counter being performed, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (render pattern) are determined. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot, jackpot type If 16R probability variation jackpot, set 16R probability variation jackpot flag on.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is secondly displayed stop, and the last stop symbol is finally displayed stopped. The symbol is In the effect pattern type table, a normal reach effect pattern type table (see FIG. 25A) in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), and the final individual effect type in the variable game effect Super reach effect pattern type table (see FIG. 25B) which is super reach effect (see FIG. 27), special reach effect pattern type in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is special reach effect (see FIG. 27) A table (see FIG. 25C) is included.

  Here, FIG. 24A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 24A, in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 24 (A) is a symbol combination which shows that the main symbols are "1"-"9" and "333" is a probability variation big hit (either 5R probability variation big hit and 16R probability variation big hit), "777" "The symbol combination which shows that it is 16R probability variation big hit, It is a symbol combination which shows that Zoro eyes except" 333 "and" 777 "are either 5R regular hit, 5R probability variation big hit and 16R probability variation big hit. It is assumed.

  There is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol in "5R normal jackpot" in the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, from the main symbols other than "3" and "7" The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating that it is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, there is no distribution of "7" as a 1st stop symbol in a lottery result "5R probability variation big hit", and a 1st stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", symbol combinations other than symbol combination "333" indicating 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of the eyelids other than the symbol combination of "333" which suggests that the stop display result of the main symbol indicates the 5R normal jackpot may be stopped and displayed. And, when the main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", in the big hit game which is shifted after the end of the variation game, A promotion effect is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”.

  In addition, the lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9" The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than symbol combinations “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates that the stop display result of the main symbol indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stop display It can be done. And when the lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit" and the main symbol other than "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the lottery result is "16R" in the big hit game which is shifted after the end of the fluctuation game. A promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is "permanent variation jackpot" is executed.

  And MPU51 will determine the 2nd stop symbol and the last stop symbol to the same symbol as the 1st stop symbol determined previously, if a 1st stop symbol is determined, when a lottery result is a big hit. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display portion 341 in the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, the lottery result is "off", there is a distribution to all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9" Be done. Then, when the first stop symbol is determined when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 51 determines the information on the outlier type selected on the basis of the outlier type table (see FIG. 9D), and determines it first. The second stop symbol is determined based on the first stop symbol. For example, when the off classification is the front and back off reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the off classification is reach other than back and forth, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined to be a symbol. Moreover, when the said outclassification type is complete detachment, a 2nd stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from a 1st stop symbol, and a final stop symbol is determined irrespective of a 1st stop symbol and a 2nd stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are displayed in the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 24B is a view showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), in the fluctuation type table, the contents of the fluctuation display time and the fluctuation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach effect pattern” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the fluctuation pattern is “01”. In addition, the fluctuation display time "60s" and the fluctuation type "super reach effect pattern" are associated with the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit" and the fluctuation pattern is "02". The fluctuation display time "90s" and the fluctuation type "special reach effect pattern" are associated with the fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R probability fluctuation big hit" and the fluctuation pattern is "03". Furthermore, the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern" are associated with the fluctuation pattern command "D04" whose lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04", and the lottery is The fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “D05” whose result is “displacement” and the fluctuation pattern is “05”.

  Furthermore, FIG. 25 (A)-FIG. 25 (C) are figures which show an example of an effect pattern classification table. The effect pattern type table is set for each change type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 25 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type table to be referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25 (B) is a variable game It is a super reach effect pattern table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the effect is a super reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25 (C) is a final reach effect type in the variable game effect is special reach effect It is a special reach effect pattern table to be referred to in the case of (see FIG. 27).

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the effect type corresponding to each variation type is five is described as an example, the effect type may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 25, the effect type table when the change type is not reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect pattern type table shown in FIG. 25 (A), as an effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit and out) “Effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X5” are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the change type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. Do. Here, the effect pattern X1 to effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table is, for example, an effect in which normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the high speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed. The final individual effect type is effect that is normal reach effect (see FIG. 27).

  Further, in the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25B, “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (render pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result select. Here, for the effect pattern Y1 to effect pattern Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern table, for example, normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and further, the jackpot expectation is higher than normal reach effect as the final individual effect type, This is a presentation that develops into a super reach presentation that has a longer execution time than the normal reach presentation (see FIG. 27). The super reach effect pattern table may include a super reach effect pattern effect which develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (render pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result select. Here, for the effect pattern Z1 to effect pattern Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, normal reach effect and super reach effect are executed after the end of high-speed fluctuation effect, and normal reach effect or super reach effect as the final individual effect type. This is a presentation that develops into a special reach presentation with a higher jackpot expectation degree and a longer presentation execution time than normal reach presentation (see FIG. 27). The special reach effect pattern table may include a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect without passing through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Good.

  Then, the MPU 51 displays in the RAM 512 a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation pattern table, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type table and the effect type counter, and the fluctuation type (effect pattern type). Set

<Step S2204>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, in step S2204, the MPU 51 executes a movable service member operation timing determination process for determining the operation timing of the movable service member 39 (the execution period of the movable service member operation effect). In the movable service member operation timing determination process, the movable service member 39 at each of the plurality of operation timings based on the movable service member operation timing selection table selected according to the effect pattern type determined in step S2203. The presence or absence of the operation of (the presence or absence of execution of the movable combination product operation effect) is determined.

  Here, FIG. 26 is a view showing an example of the movable combination product operation effect. The movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance up effect indicating an expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, or a confirmed effect (one-shot notification effect) indicating that the lottery result is a big win Ru. This movable combination product operation effect is shown in FIG. 26B from the standby position where the movable combination product 39 does not inhibit the visual effect of the image effect executed by the symbol display portion 341 shown in FIG. 26A. It is an effect of returning to the standby position shown in FIG.

  In the movable role product operation effect, the movable property component 39 is stopped for a certain period of time in the operating position shown in FIG. 26 (B). At this time, in the movable part product member 39, a plurality of lamps 391 provided in an annular shape at the peripheral edge suggests that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is the expectation of being a big hit, or the lottery result is a big hit Explicitly For example, the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391 indicates the jackpot expectation for the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391 is set so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher in the order of white, yellow, green and red, and the movable combination member 39 is shown in the movable combination member operation effect While stopping at the standby position shown in 26 (B), the plurality of lamps 391 are lit in the lighting color of the jackpot expectation degree determined according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the lighting result may include all of white, yellow, green and red as the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391 so as to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a big hit, and the lighting pattern and lighting By appropriately setting the color, it may be made clear that the lottery result is a big hit by executing the lamp effect of the rainbow.

  Of course, regardless of the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of lamps 391 may indicate the jackpot expectation or clearly indicate that it is a jackpot. Further, when the movable combination member 39 is in the operation position shown in FIG. 26B, the effect display may be performed to generate an effect around the movable combination member 39 in the symbol display portion 341. In the effect presentation in this case, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation or to indicate that it is a jackpot by the color and size of the effect.

  Further, in performing the movable combination product member operation effect, it is also conceivable to execute the chance effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree using the symbol display portion 341. For example, as shown in FIG. 26C, before moving the movable part member 39 from the standby position to the operating position, the four lamps 391 disposed in the portion exposed from the opening 31A in the movable part member 39 It is conceivable that a corresponding effect is performed in which the symbol display unit 341 displays an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree and the development of a future effect in the symbol display unit 341. In FIG. 26 (C), in the order from the left to the symbol display portion 341, "?", "Chance" (big hit expectation suggested), "reach" (representation development suggested) and "super heat" (big hit expected degree suggested) The character image of is displayed. Then, in the movable role part 39, a roulette effect in which one lamp 391 is turned on after the four lamps 391 are blinked is executed. In FIG. 26C, the lamp 391 corresponding to the "chance" is lit to indicate the state.

  Moreover, when the roulette effect shown in FIG. 26C is executed, the movable role member 39 is moved to the operating position, and the jackpot expectation degree is achieved using the plurality of lamps 391 of the movable role member 39. It is also conceivable to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the effect or jackpot is suggested. For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the jackpot expectation degree is suggested according to the number of lighting of the plurality of lamps 391 (the jackpot expectation is made higher as the number of lighting of the lamps is larger), and all the lamps 391 are turned on It is also conceivable to make a jackpot finalization effect when it is done. Hereinafter, an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit by the movable role effect may be referred to as "one-shot notification effect".

  In addition, when the effect which suggests a big hit expectation degree is performed by the lighting number of lamps 391 when the movable combination member 39 is in the operation position (except for one-shot notification effect), the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position When it returns, development presentation such as super reach production and special reach production may be performed. In this case, when the movable service member 39 is in the operating position, the number of lights of the lamp 391 and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the development effect (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect displayed at the start of the development effect execution It may be linked with the number of stars shown). That is, it is also conceivable to first suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect to be executed later by the number of lights of the lamp 391 when the movable service member 39 is in the operation position. For example, when the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect is suggested by the number of stars (for example, the number of stars is 1 to 5), the movable role member 39 operates when the development effect of three stars is executed as the development effect. When in the position, it is conceivable to set the number of lights of the lamp 391 to three.

  Further, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the central effect of the movable combination member 39 may be lighted to emphasize that the effect is the fixed effect. And when one-shot notification effect is executed, when the movable combination member 39 returns to the standby position, the variation of the main symbol may be stopped at the eye of the eye, or the variation of the main symbol is continued. The main design may be stopped by the eye after the turning. In addition, if the movable symbol member 39 returns after the one-shot notification effect is executed, it is determined based on the relationship between the determined effect pattern and the operation timing of the movable symbol member 39 whether the fluctuation of the main symbol is stopped. Be done.

  It is also conceivable to execute an effect that causes the symbol display portion 341 to display an image that causes an effect to occur around the movable combination member 39 when the movable combination member 39 is in the operating position. In this case, it may be considered that the color or size of the effect suggests the jackpot expectation or explicitly indicates that it is the jackpot. For example, it is possible to clearly indicate that it is a jackpot by generating an iridescent effect around the movable part member 39. The “one-shot notification effect” also includes an effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit by generating an effect of rainbow color around the movable role member 39 like this. That is, the “one-shot notification effect” is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit as the movable combination member 39 is operated, and the “one-shot notification effect” includes the movable combination member 39 Also included is a case where a jackpot determination effect is performed by an effect performed by the symbol display section 341 in conjunction with the operation.

  Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable combination member 39 and the touch operation reception period for the touch operation effect together with the effect pattern. First, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation timing of the movable combination member 39 will be described. Note that the touch operation reception period for the touch operation effect will be referred to when describing the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 described later. Further, in FIG. 27, the operation timing of the movable combination member 39 defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern means that the effect pattern is not set. For example, in FIG. 27, the operation timing G2 means that the non-reach effect pattern is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, six operation timings G1 to G6 are fixedly defined as the timing at which the movable service member 39 can operate. The operation timing of the movable combination member 39 does not have to be fixedly defined in all of the effect patterns, and for example, the activation timing of the movable combination member 39 may be individually defined for each of the effect pattern types.

  The operation timing G1 is started immediately after the start of the high-speed variation production (immediately after the start of the variation of the main symbol) and ends in the early stage of the high-speed variation production. That is, the operation timing G1 may be set for the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern.

  The actuation timing G2 starts immediately after the start of normal reach production and ends in the early stage of normal reach production. That is, the operation timing G2 may be set for the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern.

  The actuation timing G3 starts immediately after the start of the super reach production and ends in the early stage of the super reach production. The operation timing G4 is set in the middle of the super reach effect. That is, the actuation timings G3 and G4 can be set for the super reach effect pattern and the special reach effect pattern.

  The actuation timing G5 is started immediately after the start of the special reach production, and ends in the early stage of the special reach production. The actuation timing G6 is set at the end of the special reach production. That is, the actuation timings G5 and G6 can be set for the special reach effect pattern.

  In other words, the number of operation timings set in each effect pattern type varies depending on the effect pattern type. Specifically, when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern, the operation timing G1 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect. Note that the non-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which only the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed immediately after the start of fluctuation is executed.

  When the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timing G1, the operation timing G2 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the normal reach effect. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which normal reach effect that does not develop into super reach effect or special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect is executed as the final individual effect.

  Further, when the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 and G2, the operation timing G3 of the early stage immediately after the start of the super reach effect and the operation timing G4 of the middle of the super reach effect are set. ing. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect.

  Further, when the effect pattern is the special reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 to G4, the operation timing G5 of the early stage immediately after the start of the special reach effect and the operation timing G6 of the final stage of the super reach effect are set. ing. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, the normal reach effect, and the super reach effect.

  Here, FIGS. 28 to 30 are diagrams showing an example of the movable combination member operation timing selection tables A to C, and the movable combination member operation timing selection table A shown in FIG. This table is referred to when the operation timing of the movable combination member 39 is determined in some cases, and the movable combination member operation timing selection table B shown in FIG. 29 is a table of the movable combination member 39 when the effect pattern type is super reach effect. Referenced when determining the operation timing, the movable service member operation timing selection table C shown in FIG. 30 is referenced when determining the operation timing of the movable service member 39 when the effect pattern type is special reach effect. Ru.

  In FIGS. 28 to 30, “◎” indicates that the movable character member 39 is operated as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot announcement effect), “O” is movable as a chance up effect (big hit expectation degree suggestive effect) That the accessory 39 is activated, "x" means that the movable accessory 39 is not activated, and "-" means that there is no corresponding actuation timing. Moreover, although FIG. 28-FIG. 30 abbreviate | omitted about the case where a production | presentation pattern is a non-reach production | presentation pattern, it may set suitably about whether a movable combination member operation presentation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the movable combination member operation timing selection table A referred to when the effect pattern type is normal reach effect is for each effect pattern type (effect pattern X1 to X5) of the normal reach effect pattern, Whether or not the movable combination member 39 is operated at each of the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable combination member 39 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery (whether or not to execute the movable combination member operation effect) It is prescribed.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X1 and the lottery result is the 5R probability variation jackpot, the movable combination member 39 is operated at the operation timing G1, and the movable combination member 39 is not operated at the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X1 is selected when the lottery result is 5R probability variation jackpot, the movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect in the normal reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X3 and the lottery result is out, the movable combination member 39 is not operated at any of the operation timing G1 and the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X3 is selected when the lottery result is out, the movable combination member operation effect is not executed at all in the normal reach effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the movable combination member operation timing selection table B, which is referred to when the effect pattern type is the super reach effect, is for each effect pattern type (effect pattern Y1 to Y5) of the super reach effect pattern. Whether to operate the movable combination 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G4 of the movable combination 39 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery (whether or not to execute the movable combination operation effect Is specified.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member 39 is operated at only the operation timing G3 of the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings In G1, G2 and G4, the movable combination member 39 is not actuated. That is, when the effect pattern Y1 is selected when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the super reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable combination member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2 and G3 of the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation is performed. At timings G1 and G4, the movable service member 39 is not actuated. In other words, when the effect pattern Y3 is selected when the lottery result is 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable combination member operation effect is provided as a chance up effect immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the normal reach effect pattern and immediately after the start of the super reach effect. To be executed.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y5 and the lottery result is out, the movable combination member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G1 of the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings G2 to G2 In G4, the movable part member 39 is not actuated. That is, when the effect pattern Y5 is selected when the lottery result is out, the movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the movable combination member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) among the special reach effect patterns. Whether or not the movable combination member 39 is operated at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable combination member 39 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery each time (whether or not to execute the movable combination member operation effect Or) is specified.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member 39 is actuated at only the actuation timing G3 of the actuation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining actuation timings In G1, G2, and G4 to G6, the movable combination member 39 is not actuated. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variation big hit, the movable combination member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operation is performed. At timings G1 to G4, the movable combination member 39 is not actuated. That is, when the effect pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable role member as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and at the end The actuation effect is executed.

  Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z4 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2, G3, G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the rest The movable part member 39 is not operated at the operation timings G1, G4 and G5. In other words, when the effect pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and immediately after the start of the super In the final stage of the special reach effect, the movable role member operation effect is executed as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot notification effect).

  Then, based on the effect pattern determined in step S 2203 and the movable combination member operation timing selection tables A to C selected according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery, the MPU 51 sets the movable combination at each operation timing. The presence or absence of the operation of the object member 39 (presence or absence of execution of the movable combination member operation effect) is determined. The operation timing of the movable combination member 39 determined in this manner is stored in the RAM 512, and based on the operation timing stored in the RAM 512, the movable combination member operation presentation is performed during execution of the variable game presentation.

<Step S2205>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, in step S2205, the MPU 51 executes a touch operation effect determination process. In the touch operation effect determination process, the reception period and content of the touch operation effect are determined. The details of the touch operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the touch operation effect may be determined at a stage where it is determined that the touch operation effect is to be performed by performing the touch operation within the touch operation reception period. In this case, the touch operation effect determination process in the command determination process is omitted, and in step S2205, the touch operation reception period may be determined instead of determining the touch operation effect.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command to the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined in accordance with fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one at a time in step S1705 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 and the MPU 51 decrements the symbol variation display based on the variation display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the counter value of the variation display counter becomes zero.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 controls the display fluctuation pattern command for specifying the contents of the fluctuation game effect including the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display portion 341, the fluctuation type (render pattern), and the touch operation effect. 6 to end the command determination process. The display change pattern command is information for identifying the content of the change game effect and the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2203. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores, for example, a fluctuation image and effect image of a main symbol corresponding to each of the display fluctuation pattern commands. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and the effect display in the symbol display portion 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display change pattern command, the change type and the change game effect. A movable combination member operation presentation, an audio output presentation and a lamp presentation are performed on the other combination means such as the movable combination member 39.

  Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the fluctuation display of a plurality of main symbols (three in the present embodiment) until the preset fluctuation display time elapses. And the change of a plurality of main symbols is stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the big hit lottery is displayed, processing corresponding to the next variable game symbol variation display or the big hit game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, the game effect specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes the process based on the other command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Touch operation effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect determination process executed in step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. In the touch operation effect determination process, a plurality of touch operations are performed based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the lottery result in the big hit lottery, and the value of the touch operation effect type lottery counter. At each reception timing, the touch operation effect is determined when the touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 in which the movable combination product operation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the movable combination member 39 is operated during the touch operation reception period, so that it is mistaken that the player performs the touch operation. It may be detected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (Step S2202 in FIG. 23: Yes), the touch operation is performed after the operation timing determination process (Step S2204 in FIG. 23) of the movable service member 39. An effect determination process is executed (step S2205 in FIG. 23). Therefore, in order to avoid false detection due to the operation of the movable combination product member 39, the reception timing for performing the touch operation effect, avoiding the operation timing of the movable combination product member 39 determined in step S2202 of FIG. It is also conceivable to make a decision. However, determining the touch operation reception period while avoiding the operation timing of the movable combination product member 39 determined in advance complicates the control processing and restricts the reception period of the touch operation (execution period of the touch operation effect) Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is determined without considering the operation timing of the movable service member 39 determined in advance.

  Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the touch operation effect. Specifically, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect A in which a touch operation reception effect for clearly indicating that it is in the touch operation reception period is not executed, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation presentation B in which operation reception presentation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (A) (FIGS. 32 (A1) to (A3)), the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation reception effect is not executed is a so-called back button effect, and the touch internally of the game machine 10 is touched. When a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341 (a specific area of the panel 25) in the operation reception period, for example, a predetermined image is displayed for a certain period on the symbol display section 341 is there. The touch operation effect A may be an effect that indicates or indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery, or may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The touch operation effect A may be repeatedly executed when there are a plurality of touch operations during the touch operation reception period, or is performed only for the first touch operation, and the second time It may not be executed by the subsequent touch operation.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (B1), in the touch operation effect B, the touch operation reception effect representing that it is during the touch operation reception period is executed. In the present embodiment, as the touch operation reception effect, a touch operation reception image (character “touch the screen”) is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 to indicate that it is a touch operation reception period. In touch operation effect B, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25) while the touch operation acceptance image is displayed (touch operation acceptance period) For example, it is an effect that a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 for a certain period. The touch operation effect B may be an effect that indicates or indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery, and may be an effect that a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the big hit lottery, but the big hit It is preferable that the effect is to indicate or indicate the lottery result in the lottery. Also, the touch operation effect B may be repeatedly executed when there are a plurality of touch operations during the touch operation reception period, or is performed only for the first touch operation, and the second time Although it may not be executed by subsequent touch operations, it is preferable that it is executed only for the first touch operation.

  When the touch operation effect A or the touch operation effect B is executed as an effect (effect that suggests a large hit expectation) which indicates or indicates a lottery result in a large hit lottery, for example, a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (panel 25 The expected degree is suggested by the type of the image displayed when the touch operation is performed on the specific The touch operation effect may be executed as an audio output effect by the speaker 26 or as a lamp effect by the electric decoration portion 27, and a touch operation by combining two or more of the symbol display portion 341, the speaker 26 and the electric decoration portion 27. A presentation may be performed. In addition, even in the case of executing touch operation effects in the sound output effect by the speaker 26 and the lamp effect by the lighting unit 27, these effects may be performed as effects that indicate the jackpot expectation.

  Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable product member 39 and the touch operation acceptance period together with the effect pattern as described above, and the touch operation acceptance period will be described with reference to FIG. . As shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are fixedly defined. Note that the touch operation reception period does not have to be fixedly defined by all the effect patterns, and for example, the touch operation reception period may be individually defined for each of the effect pattern types.

  Further, in FIG. 27, in the effect pattern in which the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2, the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2 is Means that is not set. For example, in the non-reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, the final individual effect such as the high-speed variation effect is described as ending in the middle of the first touch operation acceptance period R1, and the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is It means that it is not set. Similarly, in the normal reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, the final individual effect normal reach effect is described as ending in the middle of the second touch operation reception period R2, and the second touch operation reception period R2 is set. It means not being done. Of course, in FIG. 27, the touch operation reception period defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern means that it is not set in the effect pattern.

  The first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 are periods in which a touch operation for the touch operation effect A (see 32 (A)) is received, and from the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 Is also set to a relatively long time, relatively long. The first touch operation reception period R1 is a period which continues from immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation production to the middle of the normal reach production. The first touch operation reception period R1 is set for normal reach effect patterns (X1 to X3), super reach effect patterns (Y1 to Y3), and special reach effect patterns (Z1 to Z3). Further, in the first touch operation reception period R1, operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable service member 39 are set. On the other hand, the second touch operation reception period R2 is a period continuous to the first touch operation reception period R1 and continuing from the middle of the normal reach effect to the beginning of the super reach effect. The second touch operation reception period R2 is set for the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The operation timing G3 of the movable combination member 39 is set in the second touch operation reception period R2. The second touch operation reception period R2 does not have to be continuous with the first touch operation reception period R1 and may be separated from the first touch operation reception period R1.

  The third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 are periods in which a touch operation on the touch operation effect B (see 32 (B)) is received. The third touch operation reception period R3 is set in the middle of the super reach effect, and is set for the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The third touch operation reception period R3 partially overlaps with the operation timing G4 of the movable service member 39. Specifically, the third touch operation reception period R3 is started at the operation timing G4, and ends after a predetermined time after the end of the operation timing G4. On the other hand, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is set immediately after the start of the special reach effect, and is set for the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The fourth touch operation reception period R4 overlaps a part of the operation timing G5 of the movable service member 39. Specifically, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 starts simultaneously with the operation timing G5 and ends halfway in the operation timing G5.

  Here, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are diagrams showing an example of the touch operation effect selection table. The touch operation effect selection table is for selecting a touch operation effect to be performed when a touch operation is performed in the touch operation reception period, and is referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. In addition, in FIG.33 and FIG.34, the expectation degree (big hit expecting degree) that the lottery result in a big hit lottery is a big hit is shown simultaneously with respect to touch operation production.

  FIG. 33A shows a touch operation performed when a touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32A). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation production selection table A1 for determining a production. In the touch operation effect selection table A, according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and detachment), the touch operation production type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation production type counter is “touch Operation effects A1-1 "to" touch operation effects A1-4 "and" no touch operation effect "are set.

  "Touch operation effect A1-1" is the jackpot expectation degree is "very low", "touch operation effect A1-2" is the jackpot expectation degree is "low", "touch operation effect A1-3" is the jackpot expectation The degree is "medium", and the "hit operation effect A1-4" has a jackpot expectation degree of "high". In "without touch operation effect", even when a touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation effect is not executed. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is drawn as a lottery result Select according to

  Specifically, the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is selected when the effect patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or out. Is determined to not execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the touch operation effect A1- having a large hit expectation "very low" A value of 1 is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 39, a touch operation effect A1-2 whose jackpot expectation is "low" is determined.

  Further, when the rendering patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big number, the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is If it is 0 to 19, it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the touch operation effect A1-1 whose jackpot expectation degree is "very low" Is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 37, the touch operation effect A1-2 whose jackpot expectation is "low" is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter If the value is 38, the touch operation effect A1-3 whose jackpot expectation is “medium” is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is If the 9 jackpot expected degree of touch operation director A1-4 is a "high" is determined.

  That is, in the first touch operation reception period R1, regardless of the lottery result, basically no touch operation is performed, or a touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation, where the jackpot expectation is “very low” or “low”, is determined If the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the touch operation effect with a jackpot expectation of “medium” or “high” is determined with low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1 of the high-speed variation effect, the touch operation as the back button effect except when the lottery result is selected with a low probability in the case of a big hit As an effect, it is difficult to perform a touch operation effect with a high degree of jackpot expectation. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation in the first touch operation reception period R1 in the high-speed fluctuation effect.

  FIG. 33B shows the touch operation performed when a touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32A). It is a figure showing an example of touch operation production selection table A2 for determining a production. In the touch operation effect selection table A2, according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and detachment), “touch operation production type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter Operation effects A2-1 to "touch operation effects A2-4" and "no touch operation effect" are set.

  "Touch operation effect A2-1" has a big hit expectation "low", "touch operation effect A2-2" has a big hit expectation "medium", "touch operation effect A3-3" has a big hit expectation Is “high”, and “touch operation effect A2-4” is “big hit confirmed”. In “without touch operation effect”, even when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2, the touch operation effect is not executed. Then, if the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is drawn as a lottery result Select according to

  Specifically, when the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot or out, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 29. If it is, it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 49, the touch operation effect A2-1 having the big hit expectation "low" is determined, If the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 50 to 59, the touch operation effect A2-2 in which the jackpot expectation is “medium” is determined.

  Also, when the rendering patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19 If there is, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect A2-1 having the “big” expectation for big hit is determined, 2 If the counter value of the touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 54, the touch operation effect A2-2 whose big hit expectation is "medium" is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 55 to 57. If there is, the hit operation expectation A2-3 whose jackpot expectation is "high" is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 58, 5 If the touch operation director A2-4 is a "big hit confirmation" is determined.

  That is, in the second touch operation reception period R2, a touch operation effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation degree, which is basically "no" or "medium" no touch operation, or a jackpot expectation degree regardless of the lottery result. When it is determined and the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, a touch operation effect with a high probability of “high” or “big hit confirmed” is determined with low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2 of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, the back button effect except when the lottery result is selected with a low probability in the case of a big hit As touch operation production as, touch operation production with a high degree of expectation of big hit including big hit determination is hard to be executed. Therefore, even in the second touch operation reception period R2 of normal reach effect and super reach effect, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation except in the case where the big hit confirmed touch operation effect is executed.

  FIG. 34A shows a touch operation performed when a touch operation is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32B). It is a figure showing an example of touch operation production selection table B1 for determining a production. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and detachment), the touch operation production type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation production type counter is "touch The operation effects B1-1 to the touch operation effects B1-5 are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, “without touch operation effect” is not set, and by performing the touch operation in the third touch operation reception period R3, the “touch operation effect B1-1” to “touch” One of the touch operation effects of the operation effect B1-5 "is executed.

  "Touch operation effect B1-1" is the jackpot expectation is "low", "touch operation effect B1-2" is the jackpot expectation is "medium", "touch operation effect B1-3" is the jackpot expectation Is "high", the "hit operation effect B1-4" has a jackpot expectation of "very high", and the "touch operation effect B1-5" is a "big hit confirmed". Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is drawn as a lottery result Select according to

  Specifically, when the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or out, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 39. If the jackpot expectation is "low", the touch operation effect B1-1 is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the jackpot expectation is "medium" touch operation The effect B1-2 is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 70 to 79, the touch operation effect B1-3 having the jackpot expectation “high” is determined.

  When the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19 If there is a big hit expectation is "low" touch operation effect B1-1 is determined, if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 20-39 touch operation effect that the big hit expectation is "medium" If B1-2 is determined, and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation effect B1-3 having a high hit expectation "high" is determined, and the third touch operation effect type counter If the counter value of is 70 to 77, the touch operation effect B1-4 whose jackpot expectation is "very high" is determined, and the third touch operation effect type counter If the counter value is 78, 79 touch operation director B1-5 is a "big hit confirmation" is determined.

  That is, in the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation is “high” or more is relatively easy to be selected, and the jackpot expectation is “high” particularly when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot It is easy to select the touch operation effect which is the above. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super reach effect, the touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation is “high” or more is relatively easy to be executed, and in particular, the lottery result is definite variation In the case of a jackpot, a touch operation effect with a jackpot expectation of “high” or more is easily performed. Therefore, in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super reach effect, compared to the first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 for the touch operation effect A, it becomes easier to predict the lottery result by the touch operation.

  FIG. 34B shows the touch operation performed when the touch operation is performed in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32B). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation production selection table B2 for determining a production. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and detachment), the touch operation production type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation production type counter is "touch Operation effects B2-1 to "touch operation effects B2-5" are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, “without touch operation effect” is not set, and by performing the touch operation in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the “touch operation effect B2-1” to “touch” One of the touch operation effects of the operation effect B2-5 "is executed.

  "Touch operation effect B2-1" has a big hit expectation "low", "touch operation effect B2-2" has a big hit expectation "medium", "touch operation effect B2-3" has a big hit expectation Is “high”, “hit operation effect B2-4” is the jackpot expectation degree is “very high”, and “touch operation effect B2-5” is the “big hit confirmation”. Then, if the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is drawn as a lottery result Select according to

  Specifically, when the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or out, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 59, the big hit A touch operation effect B2-2 in which the big hit expectation is "medium" if the touch operation effect B2-1 having the low degree of expectation is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 89 Is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 90 to 99, the touch operation effect B1-3 having the jackpot expectation “high” is determined.

  Also, when the rendering patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the rendering pattern type when the lottery result is 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19, then a big hit is expected If the touch operation effect B2-1 whose degree is "low" is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 59, the touch operation effect B2-2 whose big hit expectation is "medium" is Determined, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 84, the touch operation effect B2-3 whose jackpot expectation is "high" is determined, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is In the case of 85 to 94, the touch operation effect B2-4 in which the jackpot expectation level is "very high" is determined, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter If 95 to 99 touch operation director B2-5 is a "big hit confirmation" is determined.

  That is, in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation is “high” or more is easily selected, and the jackpot expectation is “high” or more particularly when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot Touch operation effects are easily selected. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 of the special reach effect, the touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation is “high” or more is easily performed, and in particular, the lottery result is a probability change jackpot In this case, a touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation degree is “high” or more is easily performed. Therefore, in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 for special reach effect, it is most easy to predict the lottery result by the touch operation among all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4.

<Step S2301>
Referring back to FIG. 31, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process in FIG. 23 is a non-reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the touch operation effect. Of course, when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern, the touch operation effect may be executed. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. That is, when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 can determine that the effect pattern is any of the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern, and the first touch operation reception period R1 exists. Therefore, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is determined.

  Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table A1 (see FIG. 33A), the MPU 51 performs a touch operation effect according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. Decide. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display fluctuation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is to the first touch operation reception period R1. When it is determined that the touch operation effect is not performed when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1, the display fluctuation pattern command is “touch operation effect not present” as the touch operation effect type. Alternatively, the information on the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 may not be included.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a normal reach effect pattern. Here, if the effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: YES), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine touch operation effects for the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4, and the first touch operation reception period R1. Determine only the touch operation effect for. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2304.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern and the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 performs the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. The determination is made (step S2304), and the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B is determined (step S2305). That is, when the effect pattern is neither a non-reach effect pattern nor a normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 indicates that the effect pattern is either a super reach effect pattern or a special reach effect pattern, and the second touch operation reception period R2 and the third touch Since it can be determined that the operation reception period R3 exists, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 are determined.

  Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table A2 (see FIG. 33 (B)), the MPU 51 performs the second process according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter. The touch operation effect for the touch operation reception period R2 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display fluctuation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is to the second touch operation acceptance period R2. When it is determined that the touch operation effect is not performed when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the display fluctuation pattern command is “touch operation effect not present” as the touch operation effect type. Alternatively, the information on the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 may not be included.

  Further, the MPU 51 receives the third touch operation reception according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter based on the touch operation effect selection table B1 (see FIG. 34A). The touch operation effect for the period R3 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display fluctuation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is received for the third touch operation reception period R3.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a super reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determining process. That is, when the effect pattern is the super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, and the first to third touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. Determine the touch operation reception effect for R3. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not a super reach effect pattern (step S2306: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
When the effect pattern is not any of the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, and the super reach effect pattern (step S2307: No), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch operation reception period R4 for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 27). ) Is determined (step S2307). That is, when the effect pattern is not any of the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, and the super reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 can determine that the effect pattern is the special reach effect pattern and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 exists. The touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is determined.

  Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table B2 (see FIG. 34B), the MPU 51 is the fourth according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter. The touch operation effect for the touch operation reception period R4 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display fluctuation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is to the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

  The touch operation effect type for the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R4 may be set in the RAM 512 as a command different from the display variation pattern command.

[Fluctuation game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, in the variable game effect process (step S1707), in the variable game in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is notified, the movable combination product member 39 determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process. The movable operation member 39 is operated at the operation timing (step S2204 in FIG. 23), and the touch operation effect (step S2205 in FIG. 23) determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process , The speaker 26, the lighting unit 27, etc. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game effect processing executed in step S1707 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 35, the MPU 51 confirms the counter value of the fluctuation counter (step S2401), and determines whether the counter value of the fluctuation counter is 0 or not (step S2402). Here, since the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol is not changing if the counter value of the change counter is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the change game control process is ended, and the counter value of the change counter is not 0. (Step S2402: No), the process proceeds to Step S2403.

<Step S2403>
At step S 2403, the MPU 51 executes movable service member operation processing. In the movable combination product operation process, the movable combination is when the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable combination product 39 determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery The member 39 is actuated. In addition, the detail of a movable combination thing member action | operation process is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

<Step S2404>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 executes touch operation effect execution processing. In the touch operation effect execution process, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25) in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27) In addition, except when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted, the touch operation effect is executed. The details of the touch operation effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Movable work item operation process]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member actuation process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. In the movable combination product operation process, the movable combination product 39 is operated from the standby position (first position) at the operation timing determined in the movable combination product operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). It is moved to the (second position) and moved from the operating position to the standby position.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 (FIG. 23) of the movable service member 39 determined in the movable service member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing in FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of (see 27 to 30) has been reached. Here, when the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 is reached (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2502, and when it is not the activation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S2501: No) The process moves to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
If it is the operation start timing of the movable combination product 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable combination product 39 (Step S2502). Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the standby position to the operation position by controlling the motor 39a. Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable combination member operation flag to ON (step S2503), and ends the movable combination member operation process.

<Step S2504>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S2504). That is, the MPU 51 ends the operation timings G1 to G6 (refer to FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable service member 39 determined in the movable service member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing in FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to has been reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2505 if it is the return timing of the movable service member 39 (step S2504: Yes), and if it is not the return timing of the movable service member 39 (step S2504: No), the processing In step S2506.

<Step S2505>
If it is the return timing of the movable service object member 39 (step S2504: YES), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable service object member 39 (step S2505), the movable service member actuation process ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S2506 and S2507>
When it is not the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b ( Step S2506). Here, when the movable combination member 39 returns to the standby position (Step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the movable combination member in-operation flag to OFF (Step S2507), and the movable combination member activation processing is performed. finish. Further, when the movable service member 39 has not returned to the standby position (step S2506: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable service member operation processing.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 37, whether a touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the first to third touch operation pattern flags (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (of the panel 25) Whether or not there is an object in the specific area) is determined. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs touch when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “off”, “on”, or “off”. When it is determined that the operation state corresponds to the touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, “off”, the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation continuation It judges (refer to Drawing 22 (B)). The presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in step S2601 does not mean that the player actually performs a touch operation, but in all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It means that the presence of an object is detected. Therefore, when it is determined that an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the movable part member 39, and detection of the object by the movable part member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation There is.

  Here, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that the touch operation is detected (step S2601: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 determines whether the movable service member in-operation flag set to ON in step S2503 in the movable service member operation process of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 is one of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27) when the movable in-service member in-operation flag is set to off (step S2602: No). On the condition that the touch control effect execution command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) is displayed on the display control device 6 It transmits (step S2603-step S2610 mentioned later), and performs touch operation presentation.

  On the other hand, when the movable combination member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to Even if it is R4, the detection result by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is ignored by ending the touch operation effect execution process when the movable in-service member operating flag is set to ON.

  Here, the movable combination product member operating flag is turned on at the stage when the movement start signal for operating the movable combination product member 39 is outputted to the motor driver 39 c when the movement start timing of the movable combination product member 39 is reached. Since it is set (steps S2501 to S2503 in FIG. 36), at the stage where the movable combination member in operation flag is set to ON, the movable combination member 39 is not activated and is in the standby position. On the other hand, since the movable combination product member operating flag is set to off at the stage when the return to the standby position is detected by the return detection unit 39b (steps S2506 and S2507 in FIG. 36), the movable combination product member operating flag At the stage set to OFF, the movable part member 39 is in the standby position. In other words, from the stage where it is determined that the movable service item member 39 is to be actuated (the stage where the main movable service item member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the actuation of the movable service item member 39 is started) During the period until the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position, the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON, and the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored. Therefore, when the movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d The detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored regardless of whether the player is the touch operation by the player or the operation of the movable role member 39, even if the first to fourth touches are generated. Even in the operation reception periods R1 to R4, touch operation effects are not executed.

<Steps S2603 and S2604>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the first touch operation reception period R1 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (Step S2603: Yes), the first touch operation effect for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2605.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2606), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2607.

<Steps S2607 and S2608>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2608), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S2607: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2609.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
In step S2609, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2610), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S2609: No), the MPU 51 can determine that it does not fall under any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and thus causes the touch operation effect to be executed. Instead, the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

[Big hit game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, in the jackpot game effect processing (step S1708), in the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect and ending determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process) Effects are executed by the symbol display portion 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration portion 27 and the like.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, as in the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable game effect, a movable feature member actuation effect for operating a movable role member or a symbol display portion within a touch operation reception period There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the player. In this type of gaming machine, touch operation effects may be executed unexpectedly as the touch operation is performed due to the operation of the movable combination member during the touch operation reception period. That is, when the operation of the movable role member is erroneously detected as the player performing the touch operation, the touch operation effect may be performed.

  In addition, in the touch operation reception period, there are cases where a touch operation reception effect indicating that it is a touch operation reception period is performed and a case where it is not performed, and the touch operation reception period is touched when the touch operation reception effect is not performed The touch operation effect when the operation is performed is generally not a big hit expectation. On the other hand, the movable combination product operation presentation is often performed as a chance up presentation or a big hit finalization presentation. Therefore, in the state where the expectation for the jackpot is enhanced by the operation of the movable part member or it is clearly shown that the jackpot is realized, the touch operation rendition of the jackpot expectation is performed due to the operation of the movable part member Being done can be a source of diminishing interest.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the movable combination member 39 is activated while the movable combination member in-operation flag is set to ON (a movable combination member (a movable combination member From the stage where the movable part member is in the standby position immediately before the start of the operation of 39) to the stage where the return of the movable part member 39 is confirmed and the movable part member 39 is in the standby position The execution of the touch operation effect is limited by ignoring the detection results of the detection sensors 38a to 38d. Therefore, even if the movable combination member 39 starts to operate after the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON, it can be limited that the touch operation effect is performed, and of course the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position It can also be limited that the touch operation effect is executed before returning to. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is performed due to the operation of the movable combination member 39 being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, in the state where the expectation to the jackpot is enhanced or the jackpot is clearly indicated by the operation of the movable role product 39, there is no possibility that the touch operation effect with the jackpot expectation is not performed. You can suppress the decline.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the steps similar to the processing procedures will be omitted. The configurations and the processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and combined arbitrarily.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of the object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the movable service member in-operation flag is set to ON, ie, the movable service member 39 is From the stage where it is determined to operate (the stage in which the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the activation of the movable combination member 39 is started), the return of the movable combination member 39 is confirmed and the movable combination is The case where the detection results of the objects by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited until the stage where the member 39 is in the standby position has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the movable service member is in operation, the flag is set to ON, ie, it is determined that the movable service member is operated (immediately before the operation of the movable service member is started) The difference from the first embodiment described above is that the process of determining whether the presence of an object is detected by a plurality of detection sensors is not performed until the return of the movable service member is confirmed. .

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the touch operation effect execution process of this embodiment, unlike the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above, whether or not the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON. First (step S2701), and under the condition that the movable combination member operation flag is set to off (step S2701: No), the first determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Whether or not a touch operation is detected is determined based on a combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B) (step S2702). Then, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 performs one of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 as in the first embodiment described above. If there is (Yes in any of steps S2603, S2605, S2607, and S2609), the touch operation effect execution command in the corresponding touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604, S2606, S2608 or S2610).

  As described above, in this embodiment, while the movable service member operating flag is set to ON, ie, it is determined that the movable service member 39 is operated (operation of the movable service member 39 starts (Immediately before the game is performed) until the return of the movable service member 39 is confirmed (step S2701: Yes), regardless of whether the player has performed a touch operation or the movable The process (step S2702) of determining whether an object is present in front of the predetermined area of the symbol display portion 341 is not performed. As a result, while the movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is not executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the touch operation effect is performed due to the player being mistakenly detected that the operation of the movable role member is performed by the player. It can prevent. As a result, in the state where the expectation for the jackpot is enhanced or the jackpot is clearly indicated by the operation of the movable part product member 39, the touch operation presentation with the jackpot expectation is not performed, and hence the interest is You can suppress the decline of

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (a step where it is determined to operate the movable combination member 39 (the operation of the movable combination member 39 is started The case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited) is performed until immediately before the return of the movable combination member 39 is confirmed).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a one-shot notification effect for clearly indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is executed along with the operation of the movable combination member, the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect (a touch operation by the detection sensor This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that execution of the touch operation effect is limited according to the situation (judged to be present). Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect is in execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. Further, in the present embodiment, when execution of the touch operation effect is restricted, the effect (specific effect) different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect as the first embodiment described above. Is different. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result, or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 40 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 (B) is set in the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40 (A) It is a figure which shows the expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery with respect to specific production is a big hit.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801). The effect execution command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a touch operation effect or a specific effect, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811 described later. Whether or not the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is, for example, that the transmission completion flag is set to ON when the touch rendering execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811 described later. It can be determined by checking whether the transmitted flag is set to ON. In addition, it can prevent that a touch operation production and a specific production are repeatedly started by judging whether the production execution flag has been transmitted in this step S2801. However, if it is determined that a touch operation has been detected after the end of the touch operation effect or the specific effect (if it is determined that an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341), The touch operation effect or the specific effect may be performed again on the condition that there is a certain condition.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing, and does not transmit the effect execution command to the display control device 6 (Step S2801: No), the process proceeds to Step S2802.

<Step S2802>
If the effect execution command has not been sent to the display control device 6 (step S2801: NO), the MPU 51 combines the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Based on (B), it is determined whether a touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2803 and the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not judged that it is detected (Step S2802: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 is determined based on, for example, the value of the change counter and the change type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. In the following, similarly, when it is determined whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 to the fourth touch operation reception period R4, similarly, the value of the fluctuation counter and the step S2203 in the command determination processing of FIG. It is judged based on the determined fluctuation type (effect pattern).

  Here, if the first touch operation reception period R1 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: YES), the processing proceeds to step S2811, and if the first touch operation reception period R1 is not (step S2803: NO), the processing is performed. It transfers to S2804.

<Step S2804>
When it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S2804). Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S2804: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S2805, and when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S2804: No), the process is performed Transfer to S2806.

<Step S2805>
If it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the super reach effect is being performed (step S2805). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second touch operation reception period R2 is a reception period when performing a normal reach effect or a reception period when performing a super reach effect. Whether or not the super reach effect is being executed is determined based on, for example, the value of the change counter and the change type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, when the super reach effect is being executed (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2807, and when the super reach effect is not being executed (step S2805: No), the process proceeds to step S2811. Transition.

<Step S2806>
When it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S2804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S2806). Here, when it is the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2807, and the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch When it is not the operation reception period R4 (step S2807: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S2807>
If it is the second touch operation reception period R2 in which the super reach effect is being performed (step S2807: YES), or if it is either the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable in-service member in-operation flag set to ON in step S2503 in the movable in-service member operation process of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to on (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2808, and the movable combination member operating flag is set to off. In the case (step S2807: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2808>
When the movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 clearly indicates that the lottery result in the large distribution lottery is a large distribution by the activation of the movable combination product member 39 It is determined whether an effect is to be executed (step S2808). Here, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable combination member 39 (step S2808: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2809, and the one-shot notification effect by the operation of the movable combination member 39. Is not executed (step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2809>
When the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable role member 39 (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect determination process (step S2810). That is, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect determination process (the command determination process of FIG. In order to execute a specific effect instead of executing the touch operation effect determined in step S2205), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is determined in the specific effect determination process of step S2809. The specific effect may be an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation It is executed as

  Here, FIG. 40 (A) shows an example of a specific effect determination table to be referred to in the specific effect determination process executed in step S2809 in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 (B) is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect set by the specific effect determination table of 40 (A).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in the specific effect determination table, the specification corresponding to the counter value of the specific effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot and out) As the effect pattern types, “specific effect A1” to “specific effect A3”, “fixed effect A”, “fixed effect B”, and “premium effect” are defined. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), the “specific effect A1” is an effect that the jackpot expectation degree is “middle”, and the “specific effect A2” is an effect that the jackpot expectation degree is “high”, and “specificity The effect "A3" is the effect that the jackpot expectation is "extremely high".

  “Decision effect A” is an image effect of “big hit determination” performed by the symbol display section 341. The image effect as the confirmed effect A is, for example, an effect to be executed at a position where it is not possible to visually recognize or is difficult to visually recognize when the movable role member 39 is in the operating position. In this case, the fixed effect A can be visually recognized when the movable combination member returns to the standby position. Therefore, the determination effect A is included as the specific effect, so that not only whether the movable combination member 39 is activated or not, for the player, after the return of the movable combination member 39, the fixed indication is made in the symbol display portion 341 It can be noticed whether it is executed or not. As a result, since the player can continue to be interested in the effect even after the end of the movable role product effect, the interest of the game is improved.

  “Decision effect B” is an effect other than the image effect of “big hit decision”, for example, a voice output effect that causes the speaker 26 to output a notice sound of big hit decision or a notice voice from the speaker 26, a mode of big hit decision (for example, lighting by rainbow) A lamp effect for lighting the electric decorative portion 27 and a movable effect member operation effect for operating the movable product member 39 can be considered. If it is determined in step S2802 that the touch operation is detected by the operation of the movable combination member 39, the movable combination member 39 is immediately reactivated after the movable combination member 39 is returned to the standby position. It is conceivable. In this case, since the fixed effect B is performed as the second movable service member operation effect of the movable service member operation effect performed continuously, the fixed effect B is performed as an unexpected effect. In addition, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable combination member 39 is activated again after the return of the movable combination member 39. As a result, since the player can continue to be interested in the effect even after the end of the movable role product effect, the interest of the game is improved.

  "Premier production" is production of "a certainty jackpot finalization". The "premium effect" is an effect in which the selection rate is extremely low as compared to other effects, and in the present embodiment, the selection result is selected only when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, and the selection rate is 1%. For example, as the “premier effect”, an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 can be considered.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40 (A), when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. However, the premiere production is not selected. Further, when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B may be selected, but the selection rate is low.

  When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, any of the specific effects A1 to A3, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, but the premier effect is selected There is no. In addition, when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect are easier to be selected than the 5R normal jackpot.

  If the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the fixed effect A, the fixed effect B, and the premium effect is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. In addition, when the lottery result is 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect that the jackpot including the premiere effect is decided is easy to be selected compared to the 5R regular jackpot, but it is the same selection rate as the 5R probability fluctuation jackpot, and the premier effect with low probability Is selected.

  When the lottery result is out, one of the specific effects A1 to A3 is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and the fixed effect A, the fixed effect B and the premier effect are not selected. In addition, when the lottery result is out, it is easy to select the specific effect A whose jackpot expectation is "medium" and the specific effect B whose jackpot expectation is "high" and the specific effect C which is "super high" The selectivity is low.

<Step S2810>
Referring back to FIG. 39, in step S2810, the MPU 51 sets a specific effect execution command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S2809, and transmits the command to the display control device 6. Thereby, the specific effect is executed in the symbol display portion 341.

<Step S2811>
In step S2811, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected (when an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)), A touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in step S2205) in the command determination process of S23 is transmitted to the display control device 6. Thereby, the display control device 6 determines that the touch operation is detected (based on the detection of the presence of the object in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341) (step S2802: Yes And causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute touch operation effects.

  Specifically, the display control device 6 sets an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2 during execution of normal reach effect by the MPU 51. When it is determined whether or not it is present, a touch operation effect determined in advance is performed. That is, in the normal reach effect, the touch operation effect is performed, and the specific effect is not performed. Also, in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation effect determined in advance is always executed.

  On the other hand, the display control device 6 performs the second touch operation reception period R2 during execution of the super reach effect by the MPU 51, under the condition that the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable combination product member 39, the third touch operation When it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation start in the reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect determined in advance. That is, when a one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable combination member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the specific effect is executed, and the touch operation effect is not executed. In other words, when a one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable combination member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the touch operation in the period for accepting the touch operation capable of executing the touch operation Execution of the production is restricted. In addition, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed, the specific effect is always executed instead of the touch operation effect.

  As described above, in the conventional gaming machine in which the movable combination product operation presentation and the touch operation presentation are executed, the operation of the movable combination article is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, A touch operation effect may be performed. Here, the movable combination member operation presentation may be performed as a one-shot announcement presentation that clearly indicates that it is a jackpot. In particular, in super reach production and special reach production, compared with normal reach production, it is often executed as a big hit finalization production. On the other hand, the touch operation effect often includes an effect that can hardly be expected that the lottery result is a big hit. Therefore, when it is erroneously detected that the player's touch operation to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit is performed due to the operation of the movable service member, one-shot notification by the operation of the movable service member There is a concern that the player's interest in the game may be suddenly reduced if an effect that hardly can be expected to be a big hit is executed immediately after that although the effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a one-shot notification effect by the operation of the movable combination member 39 is executed in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, it can hardly be expected to be a big hit A specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect that may be executed as an effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 40 (A) and FIG. 40 (B), even in the specific effect A1 with the lowest probability of jackpot, the specific effect is “medium” in the jackpot expectation and most of being a jackpot It does not include the effects that can not be expected. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effect that can hardly be expected to be a big hit immediately after the one-shot notification effect is performed in the super reach effect or the special reach effect.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, while the movable combination member 39 is in operation, the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is confirmed. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, while the movable combination member 39 is in operation, the touch operation effect is not performed by not checking the presence or absence of the touch operation. That is, in any of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, while the movable combination member 39 is in operation, the touch operation effect is not executed regardless of the activation timing of the movable combination member 39 . However, since it is difficult to execute a presentation with a high hit probability in the early stage of the rendering pattern, for example, normal reach rendering, it is less necessary to limit the execution of touch operation rendering in high-speed fluctuation rendering or normal reach rendering. In particular, the touch operation effect by the touch operation in the first touch operation reception period R1 is scarcely necessary to limit the execution.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect. Moreover, in the first touch operation reception period R1, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect may or may not be limited according to the operation timing of the movable combination member 39. In this manner, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted at the timing at which the interest in the game is likely to be reduced through the entire effect from the start of the variable symbol display of the main symbol to the stop of the variable symbol display. Since the touch operation effect is executed as scheduled, it is possible to prevent the meaning of the touch operation effect from becoming meaningless.

  In the present embodiment, in the special reach effect pattern, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited in any of the super reach effect and the special reach effect, but in the special reach effect pattern, the touch operation effect is performed only in the special reach effect. The execution of may be restricted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the touch operation has been performed, the touch operation effect or the specific effect is immediately executed. However, when it is determined that the touch operation is ended after determining that the touch operation is performed, A touch operation effect or a specific effect may be performed. For example. When it is determined that the touch operation has been performed by the operation of the movable role member 39, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be performed after the movable role member 39 returns.

Fourth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, when the gaming machine 10 includes one movable service member 39, and the movable service member operating flag is set to ON, the detection results of the four detection sensors 38a to 38d Is ignored, and execution of touch operation effects is restricted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game machine is provided with two movable part members, and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited while the one movable part member is in operation, and the touch operation is performed while the other movable part member is in operation It differs from the first embodiment described above in that the execution of the rendering is not limited. Further, in the present embodiment, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed by two detection sensors.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a main movable combination member 39A, a sub movable combination member 39B, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, a first A sub detection sensor 38C and a second sub detection sensor 38D are provided.

  The main movable combination member 39A is a member similar to the movable combination member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, and is a first predetermined standby position positioned above the symbol display portion 341. Along the surface of the symbol display 341 by the driving force from the first motor 39a1 between (see FIG. 4) and the second operation position (see FIG. 5) set lower than the first standby position It can move up and down. The first motor 39a1 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the main movable service member 39A can be actuated at actuation timings G2, G4 and G6 among the actuation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG. Further, the coverage on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 when the main movable combination member 39A is in the first operation position is the coverage of the symbol display portion 341 when the sub movable combination member 39B is in the second operation position. Higher than the coverage on the front side. Further, the actuation frequency of the main movable service member 39A is higher than the actuation frequency of the sub movable service member 39B.

  In the left side area of the symbol display portion 341, the sub movable role member 39B is connected between the second standby position and the second operation position from the center of the symbol display portion 341 on the right side of the second standby position. It is movable in the left-right direction along the surface of the symbol display portion 341 by the driving force from 39a2. The second motor 39a2 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the sub movable service member 39B can be actuated at actuation timings G1, G3, and G5 among the actuation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG.

  The sub movable role member 39B includes a display unit 391B configured of a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. That is, the sub movable role member 39 also has a function as a sub display. In the display unit 391B, for example, an effect interlocked with the variable game effect performed by the symbol display unit 341 is performed. In addition, in the display unit 391B, a touch operation reception effect and a touch operation effect are performed. The display content on the display unit 391 B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on the variable display command and the like transmitted from the MPU 51.

  In the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 27, the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3 are touch operations on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. It is a period during which the display unit 391B receives a touch operation for executing a rendition, and the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 perform a touch operation for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect. It is a period received by the symbol display portion 341. In addition, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation reception effect representing that it is a touch operation reception period is executed.

  The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, and are optical sensors such as a diffuse reflection type sensor. The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received. The first main detection sensor 38A is disposed on the upper right side of the symbol display portion 341, and the second main detection sensor 38B is disposed on the left side of the central portion of the symbol display portion 341. The range in which the presence can be detected is different.

  Here, FIG. 43 is a front view schematically showing the detection range of the main detection sensors 38A and 38D with respect to the symbol display portion 341 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 43 (A) shows the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (cross hatched portion in the figure), and FIG. 43 (B) shows the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B FIG. 43 (C) shows the overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (cross hatching is applied in the figure). Part).

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A), the first main detection sensor 38A detects the presence of an object in the area excluding the lower part and the upper right part of the symbol display part 341 based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. .

  As shown in FIG. 43 (B), the second main detection sensor 38B detects the left portion of the symbol display portion 341 (the operation area of the sub movable service member 39B) and the right based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of an object in the area excluding the lower part.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (C), the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42 (A)) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42 (B)) is , It is an area excluding the left part (the operation area of the sub movable service member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part and the lower right part of the symbol display part 341. In this overlapping area, the left side (the operating area of the sub movable combination member 39B) and the lower part of the symbol display portion 341 are not in the detection range, for example, it is erroneously determined that the player performed the touch operation by the gaming ball passing the warp. Detection can be prevented. Further, in the overlapping area, the left portion of the symbol display portion 341 (the operation area of the sub movable role member 39B) is not in the detection range, for example, the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B is a line In this case, it is possible to prevent false detection that the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) By detecting the presence, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. That is, when both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object, the MPU 51 touches the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (the specific area of the panel 25). It is determined that the operation has been performed.

  Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, it may be determined that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. Further, the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B may be disposed not only around the symbol display portion 341 but also at the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341. Furthermore, the number of main detection sensors may be one or more, and may be two or more other number.

  The first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B, and an optical sensor such as a diffuse reflection type sensor Sensor. The first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received. The first sub detection sensor 38C is disposed at the upper center of the display unit 391B, and the second sub detection sensor 38D is disposed at the lower center of the display unit 391B, and the range in which the presence of an object can be detected is different.

  Here, FIG. 44 is a front view schematically showing detection ranges of the first and second sub detection sensors 38C, 38D with respect to the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. Specifically, FIG. 44 (A) shows the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C (cross hatched portion in the figure), and FIG. 44 (B) shows the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D. FIG. 44 (C) shows the overlapping range between the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D (cross hatching is applied in the figure). Part).

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A), the first sub detection sensor 38C excludes the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received Detect the presence of objects in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (B), the second sub detection sensor 38D excludes the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (C), the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C (see FIG. 44 (A)) and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D (see FIG. 44 (B)) is , An area excluding the four corners of the display portion 391B. That is, the detection ranges of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D are set to be different.

  By the way, each of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D may detect an object other than the front side of the display unit 391B (left or right of the display unit 391B). For example, a game ball passing the warp and passing the left side of the display portion 391B, a main movable combination member 39A moving on the right side of the display portion 391B, and a player's action on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 There is a possibility. On the other hand, whether or not the overlapping range between the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D has been touched on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. If the detection range determines whether the touch operation is performed, an object present around the display portion 391B can be prevented from erroneously detecting that the touch operation has been performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the overlapping range between the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D is a touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. It is a detection range for judging whether or not it is. That is, when both of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 341 is performed. Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D, it may be determined that an object is present on the front side of the display unit 391B. The number of sub detection sensors may be one or more, and may be two or more.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the two movable part members 39A and 39B, the two display parts 341 and 391B, and the detection sensor 38A for detecting the touch operation on the respective display parts 341 and 391B. ~ 38D. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D having different detection ranges are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main movable movable effect based on the touch operation on the front side of the sub movable combination member 39B different from the symbol display portion 341 is prevented while false detection due to the operation of the main movable combination member 39A is prevented. It becomes possible to make the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39A execute. As a result, even when the main movable combination member 39A is operating, it is possible to receive a touch operation and execute a touch operation effect. In such a present embodiment, mainly the processing such as the touch operation detection processing, the movable service member operation processing, the touch operation effect execution processing and the like is different from the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the above-described process different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Touch operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (panel 25 is formed based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B in the same procedure as the first embodiment described above. The touch operation state with respect to the specific area in (1) is detected, and processing for sequentially updating the touch operation history for the past three times in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is executed (steps S2901 to S2908). Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, whereby the symbol display portion is formed at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. It is determined whether the player has performed a touch operation on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the screen 341.

  Further, in the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, based on the detection results of the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D, the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B is A touch operation state is detected, and processing for sequentially updating the touch operation history for the past three times on the front side of the display unit 391B is executed (steps S2909 to S2916). Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, when the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the display unit 391B is performed at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of the touch operation by the player on the front side of the is determined.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
As shown in FIG. 45, in steps S2901 and S2902, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the touch operation history of two and one before in the touch operation history with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. Do. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second main touch operation detection flag to the first main touch operation detection flag (step S2901), and sets the third main touch operation detection flag to the second main touch The operation detection flag is shifted (overwritten) (step S2902).

<Steps S2903 and S2904>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether the presence of the touch operation object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: Yes) And the first main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2904), and the process proceeds to step S2905. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2905 without setting the first main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2905 and S2906>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: Yes), The second main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2906), and the process proceeds to step S2907. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2907 without setting the second main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state as the third main touch operation detection flag based on the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third main touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, the MPU 51 determines that the object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, Set the main touch operation detection flag to on. On the other hand, when at least one of the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 has an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 It is determined that the third main touch operation detection flag is set to off. When the setting of the third main touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and shifts the processing to step S2909.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In steps S2909 and S2910, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the touch operation history of two and one before in the touch operation history on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second sub touch operation detection flag to the first sub touch operation detection flag (step S2909), and sets the third sub touch operation detection flag to the second sub touch operation detection flag. Shift (overwrite) (step S2910).

<Steps S2911 and S2912>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 determines whether the presence of an object is detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C, and when the presence of an object is detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C (step S2911: Yes), The first sub detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S2912), and the process proceeds to step S2913. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C (step S2911: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2913 without setting the first sub detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2913 and S2914>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D, and when the presence of an object is detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D (step S2911: Yes), The second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S2914), and the process proceeds to step S2915. On the other hand, when the second sub detection sensor 38D does not detect the presence of the object (No at step S2913), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2915 without setting the second sub detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2915 and S2916>
In step S2915, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state as the third sub touch operation detection flag based on the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, when both the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag are set to on, the MPU 51 sets the third sub touch operation detection flag to on. That is, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D, the MPU 51 has an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. Then, the third sub touch operation detection flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when at least one of the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 does not have an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the display unit 391B. It is determined that the third sub touch operation detection flag is set to off. When the setting of the third sub touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection process.

  As described above, in the touch operation detection process, the processes of steps S2901 to S2908 are performed, and the touch operation state for the last three times at 1 msec intervals as the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is performed. Are stored in the RAM 512 as the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is stored as the third main touch operation detection flag, the touch operation state immediately before is stored as the second main touch operation detection flag, and two are used as the first main touch operation detection flag. The previous operation state is stored. Then, based on the main touch operation history with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 consisting of the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag, the touch on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 An operation detection pattern is determined.

  Here, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation situation.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the main touch operation history is “on”, “on”, or “on”, the MPU 51 continues the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. It is determined that the first main touch operation pattern flag is "on", the second main touch operation pattern flag is "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is "off".

  Further, when the main touch operation history is "off", "on", or "on", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is started, and the first main touch is performed. The operation pattern flag is set to "off", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

  Further, when the main touch operation history is "on", "off", or "off", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is finished, and the first main touch is performed. The operation pattern flag is set to "off", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "on".

  Further, when the main touch operation history is neither the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation nor the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is not performed. The first main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

  Further, in the touch operation detection process, the processes of steps S2909 to S2916 are executed, whereby the last three touch operation states at intervals of 1 msec are used as the sub touch operation history for the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. The first sub touch operation detection flag to the third sub touch operation detection flag are stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is stored as the third sub touch operation detection flag, the touch operation state immediately before is stored as the second sub touch operation detection flag, and the second previous touch operation detection flag is stored as the first sub touch operation detection flag The state is stored. Then, based on the main touch operation history on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B including the first sub touch operation detection flag to the third sub touch operation detection flag, the touch operation detection pattern on the front side of the display unit 391B Is determined.

  Here, FIG. 46 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a sub touch operation data table indicating the relationship between the sub touch operation detection pattern and the sub touch operation situation.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, when the sub touch operation history is "on", "on", or "on", the MPU 51 performs a touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. It is determined that the operation is continued, the first sub touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", the second sub touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third sub touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

  Further, when the sub touch operation history is “off”, “on”, or “on”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391 B of the sub movable role member 39 B is started, and the first The sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”, and the third sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”.

  Further, when the sub touch operation history is “on”, “off”, or “off”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391 B of the sub movable role member 39 B is completed, and the first The sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, and the third sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”.

  Further, when the sub touch operation history is neither the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation nor the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 does not perform the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. It is determined that the first sub touch operation pattern flag is "off", the second sub touch operation pattern flag is "off", and the third sub touch operation pattern flag is "off".

[Movable work item operation process]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service object member activation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the movable service member operation process of the present embodiment, the process of operating the main movable service member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of operating the movable service member 39 of the first embodiment described above ( Steps S3001 to S3007). Further, in the movable service product member actuation processing of the present embodiment, processing to operate the sub movable service component member 39B is executed (steps S3008 to S3011), unlike the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 47, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A (step S3001). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G2, G4, and G6 of the movable service member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of has been reached. Here, when the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A is reached (Step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3002, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable service member 39 (Step S3001: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3004.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable role member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation of the motor driver 39c driving the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable role member 39A A signal is output (step S3002). Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable service member 39A from the standby position to the operation position by controlling the first motor 39a1. Then, the MPU 51 sets the main movable combination member operation flag to ON (step S3003), and ends the movable combination member operation processing.

<Step S3004>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable combination member 39 (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the main movable combination member 39A (step S3004). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G2, G4, and G6 of the movable service member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether the value corresponding to the end time of has been reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the main movable combination member 39A (Step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3005, and when it is not the return timing of the main movable combination member 39A (Step S3004: No) Then, the process proceeds to step S3006.

<Step S3006>
When it is the return timing of the main movable role member 39A (Step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable role member 39A. The output is made (step S3005), and the movable service member operation processing is ended. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable service member 39A from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the first motor 39a1.

<Steps S3006 and S3007>
When it is not the return timing of the main movable role member 39A (Step S3004: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable role member 39A has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b. (Step S3006). Here, when the main movable combination member 39A returns to the standby position (Step S3006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the main movable combination member in-operation flag to OFF (Step S3007), and the movable combination member operation is performed. End the process. Further, when the main movable service member 39A has not returned to the standby position (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A (Step S3006: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the sub movable service member 39B (Step S3008). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1, G3, and G5 of the movable service member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of has been reached. Here, when the operation start timing of the sub movable service member 39B is reached (Yes at step S3008), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3009, and when it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable service member 39B (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
If it is the operation start timing of the sub movable role member 39B (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation of the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable role member 39B A signal is output (step S3009), and the movable service member operation processing ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the sub movable service member 39B from the standby position to the operation position by controlling the second motor 39a2.

<Step S3010>
If it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable role member 39B (step S3008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the sub movable position member 39B (step S3010). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1, G3, and G5 of the movable service member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether the value corresponding to the end time of has been reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the sub movable service member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3011, and when it is not the return timing of the sub movable service member 39B (step S3010: No) And the movable service member operation processing ends.

<Step S3011>
When it is the return timing of the sub movable role member 39B (Step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable role member 39B. The output is made (step S3011), and the movable service member operation processing is ended. Thus, the motor driver 39c moves the sub movable service member 39B from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the second motor 39a2.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in a predetermined touch operation reception period in the same procedure as the first embodiment described above. A process of executing the touch operation effect or a process of restricting the execution of the touch operation effect is performed (steps S3101 to S3106). However, in the present embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, the symbol display portion 341 The execution or limitation of the touch operation effect is performed, but the execution or limitation of the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341 is not performed in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3.

  Furthermore, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. When a touch operation on the front side is performed, a touch operation effect is performed (steps S3107 to S3111). In the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited even during the operation of the main movable service member 39A or the sub movable service member 39B.

<Step S3100>
As shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3100). The effect execution command is a command for causing the touch operation effect to be executed on the symbol display portion 341 or the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, and the display control device 6 is executed in step S3104, S3106, S3109 or S3111 described later. Will be sent. Whether or not the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is, for example, when the transmission effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, S3109 or S3111 described later, the transmitted flag is turned on. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. Note that it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started by determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S3100. However, if it is determined that the main touch operation start in the main touch operation state is started after the end of the touch operation effect (if it is determined that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341), the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be performed again on condition that it is a reception period.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3100: No), the process It transfers to S3101.

<Step S3101>
When the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is judged (whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) (step S3101). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 corresponds to the main touch operation start or the main touch operation continuation. . Specifically, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is “off”, “on”, or “off”, the MPU 51 performs the main touch operation. If it is determined that the state corresponds to the main touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, “off”, the main touch operation state is the main touch operation continuation It is judged that it corresponds to (refer to FIG. The detection of the main touch operation by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B in step S3101 does not mean that the main touch operation is actually performed by the player, but the presence of an object in both the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. It means that it is detected. Therefore, it is determined that the main touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the operation of the main movable service member 39A, and the detection of the object by the main movable service member 39A is the main touch operation. May be falsely detected.

  Here, when it is determined that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3102, and the main touch operation is performed by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. When it is not judged that it is detected (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable service member in-operation flag set to ON in step S3003 in the movable service member operation processing in FIG. 47 is set to ON. Here, when the main movable combination product member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 selects the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). The touch control effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. It transmits (step S3103-step S3106 mentioned later).

  On the other hand, when the main movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in this embodiment, the main touch operation state is the main touch operation when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. When it is determined that the start corresponds, even if the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is in progress, the main movable combination member in-operation flag is set to ON. By ending the touch operation effect execution process, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored.

  Here, the stage at which the main movable combination member operating flag reaches the operation start timing of the main movable combination member 39A and the operation start signal for operating the main movable combination member 39A is output to the motor driver 39c The main movable combination member 39A is not in operation at the stage where the main movable combination member in operation flag or on is set to the on position (steps S3001 to S3003 in FIG. 47), and the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position. On the other hand, the main movable combination member operating flag is set to off at the stage when the return to the standby position is detected by the return detection unit 39b (steps S3006 and S3007 in FIG. 47). At the stage where the middle flag or the off is set, the main movable combination member 39A is not in operation and is in the standby position. In other words, from the stage where it is determined that the main movable combination member 39A is to be actuated (the stage where the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the actuation of the main movable combination member 39A is started), the main movable combination While the return of the object member 39A is confirmed and the main movable service member 39A is in the standby position, the main movable service member operating flag is set to ON, and the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection The detection result of the sensor 38B is ignored. Therefore, when the main movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is made by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. Even if it is detected, regardless of whether it is a touch operation by the player or based on the operation of the main movable role member 39A, the detection result by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B By ignoring, even if it is 2nd touch operation reception period R2 or 4th touch operation reception period R4, touch operation presentation is not performed.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
In step S3103, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the second touch operation reception period R2 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: Yes), the second touch operation effect for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3105.

<Steps S3105 and S3106>
In step S3105, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute touch operation effects in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3106), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3107>
When it is not determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (Step S3101: No), the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation is performed by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not it is detected (whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable role member 39B) (step S3107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (sub touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391 B of the sub movable service member 39 B corresponds to the sub touch operation start or the sub touch operation continuation. to decide. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “off”, “on”, or “off”, the MPU 51 performs sub touch When it is determined that the operation state corresponds to the start of the sub touch operation, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", the sub touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub touch operation It judges (refer to Drawing 46 (B)).

  Here, when it is determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3108, and the sub touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. When it is determined that (step S3107: No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
When it is determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3108). ). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the first touch operation reception period R1 is in progress (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable role member 39B to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. The first touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed in the display unit 391B. In the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect is not executed, and the touch operation effect A is performed by starting the touch operation (see FIG. 49A). On the other hand, when it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3110.

<Steps S3110 and S3111>
In step S3110, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. The third touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3111), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed in the display unit 391B. In the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation reception effect is executed, and when the touch operation is started, a touch operation effect B is executed (see FIG. 49B). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process.

  As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range (see FIG. 43C) of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable service object By activating the member 39A, the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of the object, the main touch operation state is Since it is judged that it corresponds to the main touch operation start, when the main movable combination member 39A is activated in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect is produced due to an erroneous detection. There is a problem that is executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the main movable combination member 39A is activated while the main movable combination member in-operation flag is set to ON (main operation (main From the stage when the main movable combination member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the actuation of the movable combination member 39A is started, the return of the main movable combination member 39A is confirmed and the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position. Until a certain stage, the detection of the object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. Therefore, even if the main movable combination member 39A starts to operate after the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON, it is possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course the main movable combination member 39A It is also possible to limit that the touch operation effect is executed before the state of the camera returns to the standby position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed due to the operation of the main movable combination member being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is performed not only on the symbol display portion 341 but also on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. Therefore, since the touch operation effects can be diversified, the interest of the game can be improved.

  And, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect performed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B is performed regardless of whether the main movable service member operating flag is set to ON. Thereby, the touch operation performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B is executed at a position where the main movable service member 39A is visible even when the main movable service member 39A is in the operating position by the operation of the main movable service member 39A. It can prevent that execution is unnecessarily restricted to production.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B by the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable role member 39B has been described, for example, as shown in FIG. The touch operation effect is executed in the symbol display portion 341 on the condition that the main movable combination member 39A is not activated by the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B in the first or third touch operation reception period R1, R3. You may Conversely, as shown in FIG. 51, the main movable combination member 39A is not activated by the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. The touch operation effect may be performed on the display unit 391B on the condition that Moreover, although FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 illustrate the case where the touch operation reception effect is executed during the touch operation reception period, the touch operation is not performed even when the touch operation reception effect is not executed during the touch operation reception period. The touch operation effect may be performed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the button is performed. Furthermore, the touch operation effect may be performed by a display unit different from the display unit in which the touch operation is performed on the condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, and the lottery result is a probability change big hit The touch operation effect may be performed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on the condition.

  As described above, when the touch operation effect is performed on the display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed, the type of the touch operation effect is performed on the display unit that the player does not expect. It can be made to pay attention not only to whether the touch operation effect of the expectation degree is performed, but also on which display unit the touch operation effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, if the touch operation effect is performed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the interest of the game is effectively improved. The interest of the game can be more effectively improved by making the condition that the lottery result is a probability change jackpot.

  In addition, when the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 and the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B are simultaneously received, the symbol display portion 341 is performed when any touch operation is performed. It is also conceivable to execute touch operation effects on at least one of the display portions 391B of the sub movable role member 39B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B during the operation of the main movable service member 39A are ignored. By limiting the execution of the touch operation effect, false detection of the touch operation by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is supported, but as in the second embodiment described above, the movement is movable. The false detection is made by not executing the process of determining whether the presence of an object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B while the accessory member operating flag is set to ON. It may correspond.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the sub movable service member 39B includes the display unit 391B, but the sub movable service member 39B may be configured not to include the display unit 391B. The configuration may include a sub display.

Fifth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the main movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (a step where it is determined to operate the main movable combination member 39A (the operation of the main movable combination member 39A Before the start of the main movable combination member 39A is confirmed), the detection result of the object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and the touch operation effect is generated. Described the case where the execution of is limited.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main movable combination member is in operation in the touch operation reception period for causing the symbol display unit to execute the touch operation, the display of the sub movable combination member is different from the touch effect It differs from the first embodiment described above in that a specific effect is performed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 52 is a view showing an example of the specific effect to be executed by the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, when the main movable service member 39A is operated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, or during operation of the main movable service member 39A When the second touch operation reception period R2 is started, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed not on the symbol display portion 341 but on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B.

  In the second touch operation reception period R2, a touch operation reception effect designating that it is a touch operation reception period is not executed in the symbol display portion 341, while in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation reception effect is in the symbol display portion 341 To be executed. Further, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable combination member in-operation flag is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by the symbol display portion 341.

  The specific effect may be an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment the jackpot expectation degree It is executed as an effect shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of this embodiment, the front surface of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3 as in the fourth embodiment described above. When a touch operation on the side is performed, a touch operation effect is performed (S3108 to S3111 in FIG. 54).

  Furthermore, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described fourth embodiment, the main movable service member operation flag is on in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4. In the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, the specific effect different from the touch effect is executed (steps S3202 to S3205 and steps S3208 to S3211 in FIG. 53). The specific effect may be an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation As shown in FIG. The display content on the display unit 391 B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on the variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

<Step S3200>
As shown in FIG. 53, in step S3200, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for causing the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341 or the touch operation effect or the specific effect in the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B to be performed, and steps S3205 and S3207 described later. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3211 or S3213. Whether the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set, for example, when the transmission execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3205, S3207, S3211 or S3213 described later. It can be determined by confirming whether the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3200: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the process is performed. It transfers to S3201.

<Step S3201>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags (sub movable Whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the character member 39B is determined (step S3201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B corresponds to sub touch operation start or sub touch operation continuation. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags determined in the sub touch operation detection pattern determination process is “off”, “on”, or “off”, the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation state is It is determined that the sub touch operation state corresponds to the sub touch operation continuation when the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”. See FIG. 46 (B)).

  Here, when it is determined that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3108 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, the processing after determination that a sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D is the same as that of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third When the sub touch operation is performed in the touch operation reception period R3, a command for executing the touch operation is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S3108 to S3111).

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202 in FIG.

<Step S3202>
When it is not determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3202) . Whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3203, and when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3202: No), the process is performed It transfers to S3208.

<Step S3203>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3202: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable combination member 39A is in operation is set to ON. It is determined (step S3203). Here, when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3204, and the main movable combination member operation flag is set to OFF. If it is (step S3203: NO), the process proceeds to step S3206.

<Steps S3204 and S3205>
When the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (a different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. Are determined (step S3204). Then, instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3204. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3205), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, the specific effect is executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the main movable role object member operating flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 performs main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether an operation has been detected (whether an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) (step S3206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 corresponds to the main touch operation start or the main touch operation continuation. . Specifically, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is “off”, “on”, or “off”, the MPU 51 performs the main touch operation. If it is determined that the state corresponds to the main touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, “off”, the main touch operation state is the main touch operation continuation It is judged that it corresponds to (refer to FIG.

  Here, when the touch detection is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. 2) A touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3207), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3208: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3209, and when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3208: No), the touch operation The effect execution process ends.

<Step S3209>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable combination member 39A is in operation is set to ON. It is determined (step S3209). Here, when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3210, and the main movable combination member operation flag is set to OFF. If it is (step S3209: NO), the process proceeds to step S3212.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
If the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect (a different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. Are determined (step S3210). Then, instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3210. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3211), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, the specific effect is executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
If the main movable combination member operation flag is set to off (step S3209: No), the MPU 51 performs the main based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags, as in the previous step S3206. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation has been detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) (step S3212). Here, when it is determined that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on the symbol display portion 341 The fourth touch operation effect execution command for causing the touch operation to be set is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3213), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

  As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable combination member 39A is operated. The presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of an object, the touch operation is performed by the operation of the main movable combination member 39A. If the main movable combination member 39A is activated in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, there is a problem if the touch operation effect is executed due to an erroneous detection. Will occur.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display portion 341, the main movable combination Under the condition that the object member operating flag is set to on, that is, the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable service member 39A (the main movable is just before the operation of the main movable service member 39A is started) The symbol display portion on condition that it is from the stage in which the prize member 39 is in the standby position) to the stage in which the return of the main movable prize member 39A is confirmed and the main movable prize member 39A is in the standby position. Instead of executing the touch operation effect in 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B. Therefore, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be performed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect is performed even if the main movable combination member 39A is operated. Can be limited. In addition to that, in place of the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341, the specific effect is executed by the display portion 391B of the sub movable portion member 39B of which the visual recognition is not inhibited when the main movable portion member 39A is activated. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game as compared to the case where execution of the touch operation effect is simply limited.

  In the case where the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on condition that the lottery result in the large hit lottery is a big hit. Alternatively, instead of executing the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed in the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, and the lottery result is surely variable A specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B on condition that the jackpot is a big hit. As described above, the player does not expect when a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is performed in the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B instead of the touch operation effect being performed in the symbol display portion 341. Not only the type (expected degree) of the touch operation effect is executed by the specific effect being executed in the display unit, but also the display unit is focused on that the effect is executed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the specific effect is executed in the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B instead of the touch operation effect being executed in the symbol display portion 341 In this way, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be further effectively improved by using the condition that the lottery result is a probability change jackpot.

Sixth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 is provided with the movable combination member 39 moved between the standby position and the operation position, and by operating the movable combination member 39, chance-up effect or jackpot determination The case where presentation is performed was explained. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, while the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (a stage where it is determined to operate the movable combination member 39 (the operation of the movable combination member 39 is The case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited) .

  On the other hand, although this embodiment is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it includes the movable service member, it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the movable service member has the display unit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable combination member is in operation during a period when a touch operation for causing the symbol display unit to execute the touch operation presentation is performed, the display combination of the movable combination member is different from the touch presentation It differs from the first embodiment described above in that a specific effect is performed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 55 is a view showing an example of the movable service member operation presentation performed by the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the movable part member 39C includes a display unit 392C configured of a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. That is, the movable part member 39C also has a function as a sub display. In the display portion 392, C, for example, when the movable combination member 39C is in the operation position, the image rendering is performed. In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the movable combination product effect and the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (see FIG. 7) overlap, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect. Be done. The specific effect may be an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation As shown in FIG. The display content on the display unit 392C is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on the variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specification of the panel 25 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4) When a touch operation is performed on the region), a touch operation effect can be performed.

  Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike in the first embodiment described above, the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. When it is present, a specific effect different from the touch effect is performed in the display portion 392C of the movable role member 39C.

<Step S3300>
As shown in FIG. 56, in step S3300, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute touch operation effect or for causing the display portion 392C of the movable role member 39C to execute specific effect, and will be described later in steps S3305, S3306, S3210 It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3311, step S3315, step S3316, step S3305, or S3320. Whether the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set, for example, when the transmission execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3305, S3210, S3320 or S3321 described later. It can be determined by confirming whether the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3300: YES), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: NO), the process is performed. It transfers to S3301.

<Step S3301>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (symbol) It is determined whether an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 341 (a specific area of the panel 25) (step S3301). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (touch operation state) of the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 corresponds to the touch operation start or the touch operation continuation. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the touch operation when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “off”, “on”, or “off”. If the state corresponds to the touch operation start and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation continuation (see FIG. 22 (B)). The detection of the touch operation by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in step S3301 includes the case where the player performs the touch operation and the case where the movable combination member 39C is operated. That is, the MPU 51 may erroneously detect that the touch operation state is the touch operation start or the touch operation continuation when the movable service member 39C is operated. Here, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that the touch operation is detected (step S3301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3302>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3302). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the first touch operation reception period R1 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: YES), the processing proceeds to step S3303. If the first touch operation reception period R1 is not in progress (step S3302: NO) It transfers to S3307.

<Step S3303>
If it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member operating flag indicating that the movable combination member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (Step S3303). Here, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3304, and the movable combination member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3303: No), the process proceeds to step S3306.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
If the movable combination product member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3303: YES), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable combination product 39C. (Step S3304). Then, instead of causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determining process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3304. The specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3305), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in the display portion 392C of the movable combination member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 in the symbol display portion 341.

<Step S3306>
When an object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (step S3303: No), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. A touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3306), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed.

<Step S3307>
When it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (Step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (Step S3307). Whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3307: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3308, and when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3307: No), the processing is illustrated. It transfers to step S3312 of 57.

<Step S3308>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member operating flag indicating that the movable combination member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (step S3308). Here, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (Step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3309, and the movable combination member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3308: No), the process proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the movable combination product member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable combination product 39C. (Step S3309). Then, instead of causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determining process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3309. The specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3310), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in the display portion 392C of the movable role member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the second reception period R2 in the symbol display portion 341.

<Step S3311>
When the movable combination product member operating flag is set to off (step S3308: No), the MPU 51 performs the second touch for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3311), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed.

<Step S3312>
As shown in FIG. 57, when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) (step S3312) . Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3313, and when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3312: No), the process is performed It transfers to S3317.

<Step S3313>
When it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the movable combination member 39C is in operation is set to ON. It judges (Step S3313). Here, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (Step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3314, and the movable combination member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3313: No), the process proceeds to step S3316.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
When the movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable combination product 39C (Step S3314). Then, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3314 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23). The specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3315), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in the display portion 392C of the movable combination member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3 in the symbol display portion 341.

<Step S3316>
If the movable combination product member operating flag is set to off (step S3313: No), the MPU 51 performs the third touch for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3316), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed.

<Step S3317>
If it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3317). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3317: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3318, and when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3317: No), Since it can be determined that none of the fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is present, the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3318>
If it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member operating flag indicating that the movable combination member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (Step S3318). Here, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (Step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3319, and the movable combination member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3318: No), the process proceeds to step S3321.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
If the movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable combination product 39C. (Step S3319). Then, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determining process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), and the specific effect determined in step S3319. The specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3320), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in the display portion 392C of the movable combination member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in the symbol display portion 341.

<Step S3321>
When the movable combination product member operating flag is set to off (step S3318: No), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3321), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, if it is determined that an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, a plurality of detections are made if the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON. By ignoring the detection results of the sensors 38a to 38d, the touch operation effect is not performed. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished by the fact that the touch operation effect to be originally performed is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display portion 341, the movable combination member operating flag is turned on. When set, instead of executing the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is performed in the display portion 392C of the movable combination member 39C. Therefore, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect is executed as long as the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON. Can be limited. In addition to that, in place of the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341, the specific effect is executed by the display portion 392C of the movable portion member 39C whose visual recognition is not inhibited when the movable portion member 39C is activated. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the display unit which the player does not expect, and in addition to the type (expected degree) of the touch operation effect being executed, the effect is executed in which display unit Can also be noticed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the symbol display portion is in the case where the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Instead of executing the touch operation effect in 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display portion 392C of the movable combination product 39C, and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot A specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be performed on the display portion 392C of the movable combination product 39C as a condition. As described above, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the specific effect is executed in the display portion 392C of the movable combination 39C instead of the touch operation effect being executed in the symbol display portion 341 Therefore, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be further effectively improved by using the condition that the lottery result is a probability change jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, instead of the execution of the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341 Although the specific effect is executed on the display portion 392C of the movable role member 39C, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be performed on the display portion 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be performed by the symbol display portion 341 may be performed by the display portion 392C of the movable service member 39C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the specific effect is not necessarily all the touch operation reception. It is not necessary to execute in a period, and a specific effect may be performed in at least one operation reception period.

Seventh Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 has been described which includes the main movable service member 39A and the sub movable service member 39B having the display portion 391B. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display portion 341 but also on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B has been described. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, while the main movable service member in operation flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable service member 39A (the main movable service member 39A Between the stage where the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position) immediately before the start of the movement of the main movable combination member 39A), the return of the main movable combination member 39A is confirmed, and the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position The case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 including the movable service member 39C having the display portion 392C has been described. In the sixth embodiment described above, the movable service member operating flag is in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 From when it is set to ON (the stage where it is determined that the movable combination 39C is to be actuated (immediately before the actuation of the movable combination 39C starts)) until the return of the movable combination 39C is confirmed In the meantime, there has been described a case where a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is performed on the display portion 392C of the movable role member 39C.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment described above in that the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes the main movable service member and the sub movable service member having the display unit. The second embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that the main movable service member is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that it is different from the sixth embodiment described above.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the main movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in a touch operation reception period for performing touch operation effects on the touch operation on the front side of the display portion of the sub movable combination member. If there is a touch operation on the front side of the display unit of the sub movable combination member, the display unit of the main movable combination member executes a specific effect different from the touch operation effect, on condition that the touch operation is performed on the sub movable combination product member. This is different from the fourth and sixth embodiments described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, focusing on the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and the sixth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIGS. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the specific effect performed by the display portion 392A of the main movable service member 39A. FIG. 58 is an example in which the specific effect is executed when the touch operation reception effect for clearly indicating that it is the touch operation reception period is not executed (first touch operation reception period R1), and FIG. 59 is the touch operation reception effect Is an example in which a specific effect is executed (third touch operation reception period R3).

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the first touch operation reception period R1, a touch operation reception effect for clearly indicating that it is a touch operation reception period is not executed, but in the first touch operation reception period R1, the sub movable combination member 39B is The main movable combination member is not the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B when the main movable combination member in-operation flag is set to ON when the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B is performed A specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of 39A.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation reception effect for clearly indicating that it is a touch operation reception period is executed, and a display of the sub movable service member 39B is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3. Even when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON when the touch operation on the front side of the portion 391B is performed, the main movable combination member is not the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect is performed on the display 392A of the member 39A.

  In the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, when the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B is performed, the main movable role member in operation flag is When it is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable role member 39B as in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 49). Also, the specific effect may be an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment the jackpot expectation degree It is executed as an effect shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the main movable service member in-operation flag is turned on. While being set (from the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable service member 39A (the main movable service member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable service member 39A is started)) Until the stage when the return of the main movable role member 39A is confirmed and the main movable role member 39A is in the standby position), the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored. The execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (steps S3101 to S3106 in FIG. 60).

  Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the sub movable combination is performed when the main movable combination member operating flag is set to off in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. When an object exists on the front side of the display portion 391B of the object member 39B, the touch operation effect is displayed on the display portion 392A of the main movable portion member 39A instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. A specific effect different from that of the above is executed (steps S3401 to S3105 and steps S3407 to S3110 in FIG. 61).

<Steps S3101 to S3106>
As shown in FIG. 60, when an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25) (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the main movable combination member operation flag If it is set to (step S3102: Yes), the touch operation effect execution process ends without executing the touch operation effect. On the other hand, if the main movable combination product member operating flag is set to off (step S3102: No), the condition is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3103 or Yes in S3105), the touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104 or S3106).

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 61, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (an object does not exist in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25) In the case of (step S3401: No), it is determined whether the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3400). This effect execution command is a command for causing the symbol display portion 341 or the sub movable role member to execute touch operation effect and causing the display portion 392A of the main movable portion member 39A to execute the specific effect, and step S3406 described later. Alternatively, it is transmitted to the display control device 6 at S3411. Whether the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is, for example, transmitted when the rendering execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, and steps S3405, S3406, S3410 or S3411 described later. The flag can be set to on, and it can be determined by checking whether the transmitted flag is set to on.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3400: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the process is performed. It transfers to S3401.

<Step S3401>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags (sub movable Whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the character member 39B is determined (step S3401). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B corresponds to sub touch operation start or sub touch operation continuation. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", or "off", the MPU 51 corresponds to the sub touch operation start when the sub touch operation state corresponds to the first to the first When the combination of the three sub touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, it is determined that the sub touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub touch operation (see FIG. 46B).

  Here, when it is determined that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3402 and the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined (step S3401: NO), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the first touch operation reception period R1 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: YES), the processing proceeds to step S3403. If the first touch operation reception period R1 is not (step S3402: NO), the MPU 51 It transfers to S3407.

<Step S3403>
When it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (Step S3402: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable combination member 39A is in operation is set to ON. It is determined (step S3403). Here, when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3404 and the main movable combination member operation flag is set to OFF. If it is (step S3403: NO), the process proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (a different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392A of the main movable combination member 39A. Are determined (step S3404). Then, the MPU 51 performs step S3404 instead of causing the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determining process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23). The specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392A of the main movable combination member 39A to execute the specific effect determined in step is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in place of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 being executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, the specific effect is performed on the display portion 392A of the main movable role member 39A. Ru.

<Step S3406>
When the main movable combination member operation flag is set to off (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 on the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. A first touch operation effect execution command for execution is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3406), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed in the display unit 391B.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3407: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3408, and when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3407: No), the touch operation The effect execution process ends.

<Step S3408>
When it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (Step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable combination member 39A is in operation is set to ON. It is determined (step S3408). Here, when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3409, and the main movable combination member operation flag is set to OFF. If it is (step S3408: NO), the process proceeds to step S3411.

<Steps S3409 and S3410>
If the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (a different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392A of the main movable combination member 39A. Are determined (step S3409). Then, the MPU 51 performs step S3409 instead of causing the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determining process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23). The specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392A of the main movable combination member 39A to execute the specific effect determined in step is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3410), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in place of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3 being executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, the specific effect is performed on the display portion 392A of the main movable role member 39A. Ru.

<Step S3411>
When the main movable combination member operation flag is set to off (step S3408: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 on the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. A third touch operation effect execution command for execution is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3411), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed in the display unit 391B.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the movable combination is determined when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (when an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341). If the object member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is prevented from being executed by ignoring the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished by the fact that the touch operation effect to be originally performed is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the movable portion is movable in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B when the role member member in operation flag is set to ON, the touch portion 392A of the main movable portion member 39A is touched A specific effect different from the operation effect is executed. Therefore, in the first or third touch operation reception periods R1 and R3 in which the touch operation effect can be performed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect is performed when the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON. Can be limited. In addition to that, in the first or third touch operation reception period R1 and R3, instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, the visual recognition is not hindered when the main movable role member 39A is activated The specific effect is executed by the display portion 392A of the main movable role member 39A. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the display unit which the player does not expect, and in addition to the type (expected degree) of the touch operation effect being executed, the effect is executed in which display unit Can also be noticed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, Instead of the touch operation effect being executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is performed on the display portion 392A of the main movable role member 39A. Well, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be performed on the display unit 392A of the main movable combination member 39A on condition that the lottery result is a probability variation big hit. Thus, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the display unit of the main movable combination member 39A is substituted for the touch operation effect being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. If the specific effect is executed at 392A, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game is further effectively improved by making the condition that the lottery result is a probability change jackpot It can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main movable combination member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341 is generated. Although the specific effect is executed by the display portion 392A of the main movable combination member 39A instead of the above, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be performed by the display portion 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be performed by the display 391B of the sub movable role member 39B may be performed by the display 392A of the main movable role member 39A.

Eighth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 has been described which includes the main movable service member 39A and the sub movable service member 39B having the display portion 391B. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display portion 341 but also on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B has been described. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, while the main movable service member in operation flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable service member 39A (the main movable service member 39A Between the stage where the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position) immediately before the start of the movement of the main movable combination member 39A), the return of the main movable combination member 39A is confirmed, and the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position The case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment described above in that the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes the main movable service member and the sub movable service member having the display unit. When the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period or the fourth touch operation reception period for executing touch operation effects in response to a touch operation in a predetermined area, sub movable A touch operation reception effect is executed on the display portion of the role member, and a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is performed on the display portion of the main movable role member by the touch operation on the front side of the display portion of the sub movable role member Is different from the fourth embodiment described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 62 is a view showing an example of the specific effect performed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable role member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, when the main movable combination member 39A is operated during the fourth touch operation reception period R4, or during the activation of the main movable combination member 39A, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is performed. When the "" is started, the touch operation reception effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B instead of the symbol display portion 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. Then, while the touch operation reception effect is being performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the presence of an object on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable position member 39B Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable role member 39A.

  Although not shown, when the main movable combination member 39A is operated in the second touch operation reception period R2, or the second touch operation reception period R2 is started while the main movable combination member 39A is in operation. Also in the case, the touch operation reception effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B instead of the symbol display portion 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. Then, while the touch operation reception effect is being performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B in the second touch operation reception period R2, the presence of an object on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable position member 39B Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable role member 39A.

  Further, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable combination member in-operation flag is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by the symbol display portion 341.

  The specific effect may be an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment the jackpot expectation degree It is executed as an effect shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, at least a part of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 overlaps the period in which the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON. In this case, the execution of the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341 is restricted, and the touch operation acceptance effect is performed in the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. Then, when the touch operation is performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being performed, the display portion 392C of the main movable role member 39C is different from the touch operation effect. A specific effect is performed.

<Step S3500>
As shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3500). This effect execution command causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect, and causes the display portion 392C of the main movable character member 39C to execute the specific effect different from the touch operation effect, and the display portion of the sub movable character member 39B It is a command for executing a touch operation reception effect or a touch operation effect at 391 B, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 at steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513 described later, S3109, S3111 or S3516 in FIG. Whether the rendering execution command has already been transmitted to the display control device 6 is that the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513, and S3109, S3111 or S3516 in FIG. It can be determined by checking that the transmitted flag is set to on and checking whether the transmitted flag is set to on.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3500: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3514, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the processing proceeds to step S3501. Transition.

<Step S3501>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags (sub movable Whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the character member 39B is determined (step S3501). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B corresponds to sub touch operation start or sub touch operation continuation. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", or "off", the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation state corresponds to the start of the sub touch operation, and the first When the combination of the third to third sub touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", it is determined that the sub touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub touch operation (see FIG. 46B).

  Here, when it is determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3108 in FIG. 64 and performs the sub touch operation by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. Is not detected (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
When it is not determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3502) . Whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3503, and when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3502: No), the process is performed It transfers to S3508.

<Step S3503>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (Step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable combination member 39A is activated is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3503). Here, when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to on (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3504 and the main movable combination member operation flag is set to off. If it is (step S3503: NO), the process proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
If the main movable role object member operating flag is set to ON (step S3503: YES), the MPU 51 sets the reception flag for specific effect to ON (step S3504). The reception flag for specific effect is displayed on the display portion 392C of the main movable combination member 39C when the main movable combination member in-operation flag is set to ON in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. This flag indicates that the display unit 391B of the sub movable service member 39B receives a touch operation for executing touch operation effects, and is referred to in step S3514 described later. Then, the MPU 51 transmits a touch operation reception effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and ends the touch operation effect execution processing. As a result, in place of the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 being executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, the main movable role is performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable portion 39B. A touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for causing the touch operation effect to be performed is received by the display unit 392C of the object member 39C is executed.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the main movable role product member operating flag is set to off (step S3503: No), the MPU 51 performs main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether an operation has been detected (whether an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 corresponds to the touch operation start or the touch operation continuation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, or “off”. If the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, or “off”, it is determined that the main touch operation state corresponds to the main touch operation continuation (FIG. 46 (A )reference). Then, when it is determined that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. A second touch operation effect execution command for setting is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3507), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed. On the other hand, when the object is not present in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3508>
When it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3508). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3708: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3509, and when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3708: No) The effect execution process ends.

<Step S3509>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (Step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable combination member 39A is in operation is set to ON. It is determined (step S3509). Here, when the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3510, and the main movable combination member operation flag is set to OFF. If it is (step S3509: NO), the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
If the main movable role product member operating flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reception flag for specific effect to ON as in step S3504 (step S3510), and the touch operation reception effect is produced. An execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3611), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, in place of the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 being executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B, the main movable role is performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable portion 39B. A touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for causing the touch operation effect to be performed is received by the display unit 392C of the object member 39C is executed.

<Steps S3512 and S3513>
If the main movable role product member in-operation flag is set to off (step S3509: No), the MPU 51 performs the main operation based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags in the same procedure as step S3506. It is determined whether the main touch operation is detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)). Then, when it is determined that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. The fourth touch operation effect execution command for setting is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3513), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. Thereby, in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3514>
If the effect execution command has not been sent (step S3500: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the specific effect reception flag set to ON at step S3510 or S3516 is set to ON (step S3514). Here, when the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3515 in FIG. 64, and the reception flag for specific effect is set to OFF. (Step S3501: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3515>
When the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3514: Yes), as shown in FIG. 64, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. (Step S3515). Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 (Step S3515: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3516, and the case is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 (Step S3515: No), the process proceeds to Step S3519.

<Step S3516>
If it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 (step S3515: YES), the MPU 51 performs the same procedure as step S3501 in FIG. 63 based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (whether an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B) (step S3516). Here, when it is determined that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3517, and the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined (step S3516: NO), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When it is determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display portion 392C of the main movable combination member 39C. ) Is determined (step S3517). Then, the MPU 51 transmits a specific effect execution command for causing the display portion 392C of the main movable role member 39C to execute the specific effect determined in step S3517 to the display control device 6 (step S3618), and the touch operation effect End the execution process. As a result, in place of the touch operation effect for the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4 being executed in the symbol display portion 341, the specific effect is executed in the display portion 392C of the main movable service member 39C. .

<Step S3519>
If it is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 (step S3515: No), or if a specific effect execution command is sent to the display control device 6 (step S3618), the reception flag for specific effect is set to off , And the touch operation effect execution process ends. That is, when the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2 or R4 ends, or when it is determined that the specific effect is to be performed, the specific effect flag that allows the specific effect to be performed is turned off. It sets to and the reception for performing a specific production is complete | finished.

<Steps S3108 to S3111>
When an object exists on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B (step S3507: Yes), the MPU 51 is on condition that it is the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3. (Yes in step S3108 or S3110), transmits to the display control device 6 a first or third touch operation effect execution command for causing the display portion 391B of the sub movable service member 39B to execute the touch operation effect (step S3109 or S3111). Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first or third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111), or the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 is not ( In step S3108 or S3110, the touch operation effect execution process ends.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, when an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38 are set if the movable combination member operation flag is set to ON. By ignoring the detection result at 38 d, the touch operation effect is prevented from being executed. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished by the fact that the touch operation effect to be originally performed is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at least one of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period in which the movable combination member operation flag is set to on. When the parts overlap, the execution of the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341 is restricted, and the touch operation reception effect is performed in the display portion 391B of the sub movable role member 39B. Then, when a touch operation is performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being performed, the display unit 392C of the main movable combination member 39C is different from the touch operation effect. A specific effect is performed. Therefore, in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance periods R2 and R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation is performed even when the main movable combination member operating flag is set to ON. Receptionist production is performed. In addition to that, in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 and R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect in the symbol display portion 341, a sub movable role in which the visual recognition is not inhibited when the main movable role member 39A is activated The touch operation reception effect is performed by the display unit 391B of the member 39B, and the specific effect is performed by performing the touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being performed. Therefore, the touch operation reception effect is executed in the display portion which the player does not expect, and the specific effect is executed by performing the touch operation on the display portion 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B with respect to the unexpected touch operation reception. . Thereby, the player can pay attention not only to what kind (type of expectation) of touch operation effect is executed, but also to which display unit is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where the main movable combination member operation flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on condition that the lottery result in the large hit lottery is a large hit. The touch operation reception effect is performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable character member 39B, and the specific effect is performed on the display portion 392C of the main movable character member 39C, instead of the touch operation effect being performed on the symbol display portion 341 Alternatively, the touch operation reception effect or the specific effect may be performed on the condition that the lottery result is a probability change jackpot. As described above, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, instead of the touch display effect being executed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation reception effect or the specific effect is executed. For example, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be further effectively improved by using the condition that the lottery result is a probability change jackpot.

The ninth embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, the movable combination member operation effect in which the movable combination member moves between the standby position and the operation position is executed, and the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case of detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area of In the first embodiment described above, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (a stage where it is determined to operate the movable combination member 39 (the operation of the movable combination member 39 is The case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited) .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the movable service member operation effect, the fake operation in which the movable service member is moved between the standby position and the intermediate position set between the standby position and the operating position. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that rendering is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 38 is provided, and the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is detected by the detection sensor 38 from the first embodiment described above. It is different.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, focusing on the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 65 shows the movable combination referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect in the movable service member operation timing determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the object member action | operation timing selection table C. FIG. In FIG. 65, “◎” indicates that the movable combination member 39 is operated as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot notification effect), “O” indicates that the chance up effect (big hit expectation degree indication production) 39 is activated, “Δ” indicates that the movable part member 39 is faked (the movable part member is activated to the intermediate position instead of the standby position), “x” indicates the movable part member 39 Is not activated, "-" means that there is no corresponding activation period.

  Here, FIG. 66 is a view showing an example of the fake operation effect of the movable service member performed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fake activation effect, the standby position is obtained after the movable service member 39 in the standby position has moved to an intermediate position set between the operating position (the position shown by the phantom line) and the standby position. Return to Further, a detection sensor 38 for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display 341 is disposed at the center on the right side of the symbol display 341. The detection sensor 38 does not detect the movable combination member 39 when the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position or the middle position, and the movable combination member 39 is formed when the movable combination member 39 is in the activated position. It is detected.

  Referring back to FIG. 65, the movable combination member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) among the special reach effect patterns. Whether or not the movable combination member 39 is operated at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable combination member 39 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery each time (whether or not to execute the movable combination member operation effect And whether or not to fake the movable part member 39 is specified.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member 39 is faked at the operation timing G2 of the operation timings G1 to G6 and at the operation timing G3. The movable part member 39 is activated, and the movable part member 39 is not activated at the remaining operation timings G1 and G4 to G6. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, the movable combination member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variation big hit, the movable combination member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operation is performed. At timings G1 to G4, the movable part member 39 is neither actuated nor faked. That is, when the effect pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable role member as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and at the end The actuation effect is executed.

  Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z4 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variation big win, fake operation effect is executed at the operation timing G2 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the operation timings G3, G5, G5 The movable part member 39 is activated at the time t1, and the movable part member 39 is not activated or faked at the remaining operation timings G1 and G4. In addition, at the actuation timings G5 and G6, the actuation of the movable combination member 39 is executed as a big hit determination effect (one-shot notification effect). That is, if the effect pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is 16R normal jackpot, the fake action effect is executed immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the special reach effect pattern, and immediately after the start of the super effect The combination member operation production is executed, and the movable combination member operation production is executed as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect and at the final stage.

  Although FIG. 65 shows the movable combination member operation timing selection table C which is referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect, the effect pattern type is the normal reach effect pattern or the super reach effect pattern. Alternatively, the movable part member 39 may be faked.

[Movable work item operation process]
Here, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In addition to the operation to the operation position of the movable part member 39 in the movable part member operation process, the operation to the intermediate position of the movable part member 39 is controlled.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the movable service member 39 or not. That is, the MPU 51 starts the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 and 65) of the movable service member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery. It is determined whether the value corresponding to the time has been reached. Here, when the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 is reached (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3602, and when it is not the activation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3601: No) , And moves the process to step S3606.

<Steps S3602 to S3605>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation timing of the movable combination member 39 by the fake operation (step S3602). When it is the operation timing of the movable combination member 39 by the fake operation (step S3602: Yes), the motor driver 39c for driving the motor 39a for applying the driving force to the movable combination member 39 A first operation start signal for moving from the standby position to the intermediate position is output (step S3603), and the movable service member operation processing is ended. Thus, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the standby position to the intermediate position by controlling the motor 39a.

  On the other hand, when it is not the operation timing of the movable service member 39 by fake operation (step S3602: No), that is, the timing to operate the movable service member 39 from the standby position to the operation position, A second operation start signal for moving the movable part member 39 from the standby position to the operation position is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force (step S3604). Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable combination member operating flag to ON (step S3605), and ends the movable combination member operation processing. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the standby position to the operation position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S3606 and S3607>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3606). That is, the MPU 51 ends the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable combination member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery. It is determined whether the value corresponding to the time has been reached. Here, the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable combination member 39 when the return timing of the movable combination member 39 is reached (step S3606: Yes). (Step S3607), and the movable service member actuation process ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the operating position or the intermediate position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
When it is not the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member 39 has returned to the standby position or not based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b ( Step S3608). Here, when the movable combination member 39 returns to the standby position (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable combination member 39 returns from the intermediate position to the standby position based on fake operation. (Step S3609). If the MPU 51 returns the movable combination member 39 from the intermediate position to the standby position based on fake operation (step S3609: YES), the movable combination member activation process ends, and the movable combination member based on fake operation is If it is not the return to the standby position 39 (step S3609: No), that is, if the movable role member 39 is the return from the operation position to the standby position, the movable role member in operation flag is set to off and the movable The combination product operation process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, when the movable service member 39 is at the intermediate position, the detection sensor 38 does not detect the movable service member 39. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable combination member 39 is at the intermediate position, that is, when the movable combination member 39 performs a fake operation, the touch operation effect is produced on the condition that the touch operation is performed in the touch operation reception period. Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted even in the case of the fake operation of the movable combination product member 39, and to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted more than necessary. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  In the present embodiment, while the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by ignoring the detection signal from the detection sensor 38 as in the first embodiment described above. What is limited may be limited, and the execution of the touch operation effect may be limited by not performing the process of detecting and confirming the detection sensor 38 as in the second embodiment described above. In other words, the limit of the execution of the touch operation effect is determined between when it is determined that the motor 39a is driven to move the movable service member 39 from the standby position to the operating position and when the drive of the motor 39a is started. When the return detection unit 39b detects that the movable combination member 39 has returned to the standby position, the restriction on the execution of the touch operation effect may be released.

  Further, when the period in which the movable combination product operation flag is set to ON overlaps with the touch operation reception period, a specific effect (see FIG. 40) may be executed instead of the touch operation effect. . In this case, the specific effect may be that the movable combination member 39A includes the display unit (see FIG. 54), and the movable combination member 39A may be executed by the display unit, or the sub movable including the display unit It may be made to be performed by the display part of a sub movable service item member as what is provided with a service item member (refer FIG. 43).

Tenth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, the movable combination member operation effect in which the movable combination member moves between the standby position and the operation position is executed, and the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case of detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area of In the first embodiment described above, when the movable combination member in-operation flag indicating that the movable combination member 39 is in operation is set to ON, the detection by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is performed. The case where the result is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing (the timing to start the movable combination member operation presentation) of the movable combination member in the touch operation reception period, the movement combination movable member starts operation (movable This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that execution of the movable combination member operation presentation is limited by not executing the processing for starting the combination product operation presentation).

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable work item operation process]
In the movable service member operation process of the present embodiment, a process of moving the movable service member between the standby position and the operating position is executed as in the movable service member operation process of the first embodiment described above. Is different from the movable service member operation processing of the first embodiment described above in that the operation of the movable service member 39 is not started when any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. .

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the movable service member 39 (step S3701). Specifically, the MPU 51 operates the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable service member 39 determined by the movable service member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing of FIG. 23) (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of has been reached. Here, when the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 is reached (Step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3702, and when it is not the activation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (Step S3701: No) The process moves to step S3705.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
If it is the operation start timing of the movable combination product 39 (step S3701: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702). Whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 It may be judged by operating a counter for judging whether or not. Here, when it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 operates the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable role member 39 Output start signal. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the standby position to the operation position by controlling the motor 39a. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the movable service member (step S3704), and ends the movable service member operation processing.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 ends the movable service member operation processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39, in the case of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the activation of the movable combination member 39 is started. The mobile service member operation process ends. Thereby, the operation of the movable service member 39 (execution of the movable service member operation effect) in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is limited.

<Step S3705>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable combination member 39 set in step S3704 (step S3705). Here, the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable combination member 39 when the return timing of the movable combination member 39 is reached (step S3705: Yes). (Step S3706), and the movable service member actuation process ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable service member 39 from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a. On the other hand, when it is not the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3704: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable combination member actuation processing.

  As described above, as a conventional gaming machine, as in the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable game effect, a movable combination member operation effect for operating a movable combination member or a touch operation reception period There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, touch operation effects may be executed unexpectedly as a result of the movable combination member operating within the touch operation reception period. That is, when the operation of the movable role member is erroneously detected as the player performing the touch operation, the touch operation effect may be performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 for receiving touch operations for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute touch operation effects, the movable role member 39 Even at the operation start timing of, the operation of the movable combination member 39 is not started, and the movable combination member operation presentation is not performed. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is performed due to the operation of the movable combination member 39 being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable part member 39 is limited in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but at least at least in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable part member 39 may be limited in one touch operation reception period. For example, while restricting the operation of the movable combination member 39 in the first and second touch operation reception periods R1 and R2, restrict the activation of the movable combination member 39 in the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 It is conceivable to cause the movable combination member operation effect to be performed without the need to do so.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (the timing to start the movable combination member operation presentation) is determined in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable combination member The case where the execution of the movable combination member actuation presentation in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is limited by the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable combination member actuation presentation) is not performed is described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing (the timing to start the movable combination member operation presentation) of the movable combination member in the touch operation reception period, the movement combination movable member starts operation (movable It is common to the above-mentioned 10th embodiment in that the processing to start the bonus item member operation effect is not executed, but the operation of the movable combination member is started after the end of the touch operation reception period (the movable event member operation effect This embodiment differs from the above-described tenth embodiment in that it is started.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69, focusing on the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment. Here, FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable work item operation process]
The movable service member operation process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the movable service member operation process of the tenth embodiment described above, but the start timing of the movable service member 39 is the first to fourth touches. In the operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable combination member 39 is suspended (step S3801), and the operation of the movable combination member 39 suspended is the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. This is different from the movable service member operation processing of the above-described tenth embodiment in that it is performed later (steps S3802, S3803, and S3703).

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 69, when it is the start time point (operation start timing) of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable service object member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 If the fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is satisfied (step S3702: YES), a bonus item operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3801). The bonus item operation suspension flag is a flag for starting the operation of the movable combination member 39 (start of the movable combination member actuation effect) after the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and will be described later. It is referred to in S3802.

  The MPU 51 is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702: No) when it is not the operation start timing of the movable combination product 39 (step S3701: Yes), the above-mentioned tenth In the same manner as in the embodiment, the operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to start the operation of the movable combination member 39 (step S3703), and the return timing of the movable combination member 39 is set.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If neither the operation start timing nor the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (No in steps S3701 and S3705), the MPU 51 determines whether the combination operation suspension flag set to ON in step S3801 is set to ON. It judges (step S3802). If the bonus item operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: YES), if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3803: NO), the process proceeds to step S3703. That is, when the bonus item operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c at the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Then, the operation of the movable combination member 39 (execution of movable combination member operation effect) is started (step S3703), and the movable combination member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operative position. The movable product member 39 in the standby position outputs the operation start signal to the motor driver 39c when it is the return timing set in step S3704 as in the above-described tenth embodiment (step S3705: Yes) By being done (step S3706), it is returned to the standby position.

  By the way, in the above-described tenth embodiment, the movable part is determined when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable part member 39 (timing to start the movable part member activation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. By not executing the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the movable item member operation effect), it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the operation of the movable object member 39 To prevent that. However, since the movable combination member operation effect in which the movable combination member 39 is operated is usually executed as a chance-up effect or a big hit finalization effect, if such high expectation is not performed, interest in the game There is a concern that interest will decline.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (timing to start the movable combination member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 as in the above-described tenth embodiment In the case where it is determined that the operation of the movable combination product 39 is not started (the movable combination product actuation effect is started) is not executed, but unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the touch operation reception period R1 After the end of ~ R4, the movable combination member operation effect is executed. That is, by setting that the movable combination product actuation effect is not started in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the operation of the movable combination product 39 In addition, after the end of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, a decrease in the interest or interest in the game can be suppressed by executing the movable combination member operation effect generally performed as a high expectation effect. .

  In the present embodiment, although the suspended movable combination member actuation effect is started after the end of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is confirmed, the start timing of the suspended movable combination member actuation effect is You may set irrespective of completion | finish of touch operation reception period R1-R4. For example, when a touch operation effect is executed, it may be after the end of the touch operation effect, or after it is confirmed that a touch operation has been performed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the movable combination product member operation effect pending is the end of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 on the condition that the player does not execute the touch operation on the symbol display portion 341 in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4. You may start execution later.

Twelfth Embodiment
In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (the timing to start the movable combination member operation presentation) is determined in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable combination member The case where the execution of the movable combination member actuation presentation in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is limited by the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable combination member actuation presentation) is not performed is described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (the timing to start the movable combination member activation effect). This embodiment is different from the above-described tenth embodiment in that execution of the movable combination member operation presentation in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not being executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment. Here, FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable work item operation process]
As shown in FIG. 70, in the movable service member operation processing of the present embodiment, unlike the movable service member operation processing of the tenth embodiment described above, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. First, it is determined whether or not there is a first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (step S3902: No), and it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 It is determined whether or not it is (step S3902). On the other hand, in the movable combination product operation process of the present embodiment, when it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3901: Yes) It is determined whether it is the return timing of the movable combination member 39 or not (step S3905) without executing the process (step S3902) of determining the time. When it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3902: Yes) and when it is the return timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S3905: Yes), the subsequent processing procedure is the tenth one described above. It is the same as that of the embodiment.

  As described above, as a conventional gaming machine, as in the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable game effect, a movable combination member operation effect for operating a movable combination member or a touch operation reception period There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, touch operation effects may be executed unexpectedly as a result of the movable combination member operating within the touch operation reception period. That is, when the operation of the movable role member is erroneously detected as the player performing the touch operation, the touch operation effect may be performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (the timing to start the movable combination member activation effect) The process of determining whether or not it is not performed. That is, in the case of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable combination member 39 is not started, and the execution of the movable combination member operation presentation is limited. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is performed due to the operation of the movable combination member 39 being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable part member 39 is limited in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but at least at least in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable part member 39 may be limited in one touch operation reception period. For example, while restricting the operation of the movable combination member 39 in the first and second touch operation reception periods R1 and R2, restrict the activation of the movable combination member 39 in the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 It is conceivable to cause the movable combination member operation effect to be performed without the need to do so.

Thirteenth Embodiment
In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (the timing to start the movable combination member operation presentation) is determined in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable combination member The case where the execution of the movable combination member actuation presentation in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is limited by the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable combination member actuation presentation) is not performed is described.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is basically determined to be the operation start timing of the movable combination member (timing to start the movable combination member operation presentation) in the touch operation reception period similarly to the above-described tenth embodiment. The process of starting the operation of the movable service member (starting the movable service member operation effect) is not performed when being performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premier effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the movable combination member is operated when the specific condition is satisfied, unlike the tenth embodiment described above. It is different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the premium effect is to be executed as the touch operation effect, the front side of the symbol display portion by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation reception period. If the touch operation is not performed on the predetermined area of the jackpot, the jackpot determination effect with the forced operation of the movable combination member is executed, and the premier effect as the touch operation effect is utilized by using the erroneous detection by the forced activation of the movable combination member To be executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 71 is a view showing an example of a continuous effect of the movable service member operation effect and the touch operation effect executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, when the specific condition is satisfied, the continuous effect of the movable service member operation effect and the touch operation effect is executed. For example, when the premium effect is selected as the touch operation effect, it is determined by the player from the start of the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 until a predetermined time set shorter than the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 elapses. When the touch operation is not performed, the jackpot determination effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable combination member 39 is executed, and the movable combination member 39 is further detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. Then, the premiere effect determined as the touch operation effect is executed.

  Here, the jackpot finalization effect (one-shot notification effect) involving the operation of the movable combination member 39 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when the movable combination member 39 is in the operation position, as shown in FIG. It is an effect that generates a rainbow effect Ef around. In addition, as a big hit finalization effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable combination product member 39, for example, a rainbow lamp performed by a plurality of lamps 391 arranged annularly at the peripheral edge of the movable combination product member 39 It can be considered that the effect, the operation mode of the movable part member 39 is a special operation mode different from the usual one, and the like. Further, the premiere effect is an effect in which the selection rate is extremely low compared to other effects, and it is an effect that clearly indicates that at least the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. In the present embodiment, the premiere effect is a probability change jackpot finalization effect that is selected only when the lottery result is a probability change jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, a group of gold fish (goldfish group) in the symbol display portion 341 It is an image effect moving from right to left. Of course, the premier effect may be another effect such as an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the symbol display portion 341.

[Movable work item operation process]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  When it is determined that the movable combination product operation process of the present embodiment is the operation start timing of the movable combination product member (timing to start the movable combination product operation presentation effect) in the touch operation reception period, It is common to the above-described tenth embodiment in that the process of starting the operation (starting the movable combination product member operation effect) is not performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the player touches the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion within the predetermined period from the start of the touch operation reception period. When the operation is not performed, the jackpot finalization effect with the forced operation of the movable combination member is executed, and the premier effect as the touch operation effect is performed using the false detection by the forced activation of the movable combination member It differs from the tenth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4006>
As shown in FIG. 72, if the MPU 51 is the operation start timing of the movable combination product 39 (step S4001: YES), if there are first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: YES) If the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are not completed (step S4002: No), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to finish the movable combination. The member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operation position (step S4003), the return timing of the movable combination member 39 is set (step S4004), and the movable combination member operation process is ended. Thus, as in the above-described tenth embodiment, the process of starting the operation of the movable combination member 39 is not performed in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, thereby making the movable combination member 39 Operation is limited.

  Further, as in the tenth embodiment described above, if it is not the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 returns the motor timing (step S4005: Yes). The return signal is output to the control unit 42 to return the movable combination member 39 from the operation position to the standby position (step S4006), and the movable combination member operation processing is ended.

<Step S4007>
If it is not the return timing of the movable combination member 39 even at the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (No in both steps S4001 and S4005), the MPU 51 executes processing different from that of the above-described tenth embodiment. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (step S4007), and if there is the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes) The process proceeds to step S4008, and if it is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: NO), the movable service member operation process is ended.

<Step S4008>
When it is the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes) The MPU 51 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4. (Step S4008), if the predetermined time has elapsed (Step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S4009, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed (Step S4008: No), the movable combination member operation process Finish. Here, the predetermined time is a limit for determining that the movable combination member 39 is to be forcibly operated, and the first to the first to perform touch operation effects using a malfunction of the movable combination member 39 It is set to a time shorter than the 4-touch operation reception period R1 to R4. The predetermined time may be set to the same time in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, or separately set for each of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It is also good.

<Step S4009>
If the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4008: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009). The forced operation flag is displayed when the player does not perform a touch operation by a predetermined time after the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, that is, by a predetermined time. It is a flag for forcibly operating the movable combination member 39 when the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the unit 341 is not confirmed, and steps S4105 and S4109 of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 73 described later. , S4113 or S4117 is set to ON.

  Here, when the forcible actuation flag is set to on (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4010, and when the forcible actuation flag is not set to on (step S4009: No), The movable service member operation process is ended.

<Step S4010>
If the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: YES), the MPU 51 transmits a definite operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4010). As a result, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute an image effect accompanying the forced operation of the movable service member 39. In the present embodiment, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 generates an rainbow effect Ef (see FIG. 71) around the movable combination member 39 at the timing when the movable combination member 39 is at the operating position. The display unit 341 is made to execute.

  Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4003 when transmitting a definite operation effect execution command to the display control device 6. As a result, the operation of the movable combination member 39 is started, and the movable combination member 39 is returned from the actuated position to the standby position at the return timing set in step S4004 (steps S4004 to S4006). That is, when the touch operation is not performed even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (both in steps S4007 and S4008, Yes), the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect Based on the forcible operation flag set to ON, the movable service member 39 is forcibly operated even if the operation start timings G1 to G6 (see FIG. 27) of the movable service member 39 are not set.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  The touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the tenth embodiment described above, but when the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable role member 39 is forcibly operated. The tenth embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment described above in that the forcible operation flag is set to on.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 73, in steps S4101 to S4103, it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the detection sensor 38 based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags, as in the tenth embodiment described above. (If there is an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) (step S4101: YES), it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S4102: Yes) The first touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the first touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4103).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4103), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premier effect is determined as the first touch operation effect. If it is (step S4104: YES), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable combination member 39 is set to ON (step S4105), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
In steps S4106 and S4107, as in the above-described tenth embodiment, in the case of the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S4106: Yes), the second touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is The second touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4107).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the second touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4107), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premier effect is determined as the second touch operation effect. If it is (step S4108: YES), the forcible actuation flag that enables the forcible actuation of the movable combination member 39 is set to ON (step S4109), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S4110 to S4113>
In steps S4110 and S4111, as in the above-described tenth embodiment, in the case of the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S4110: Yes), the third touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is A third touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4111).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4111), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premier effect is determined as the third touch operation effect. If it is (step S4112: YES), the forcible actuation flag that enables the forcible actuation of the movable combination member 39 is set to ON (step S4113), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S4114 to S4117>
In steps S4114 and S4115, as in the above-described tenth embodiment, when it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S4114: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is selected. The fourth touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4115).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the fourth touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4115), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premier effect is determined as the fourth touch operation effect. If it is (step S4116: YES), the forcible actuation flag that enables the forcible actuation of the movable combination member 39 is set to ON (step S4117), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, even when the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 comes in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the process of starting the activation of the movable combination member 39 is not executed, The operation of the movable part member 39 is limited. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being executed against the player's will by false detection based on the operation of the movable role member 39.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable role member is the case where the player does not perform the touch operation at the stage when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4. The jackpot determination effect is executed by the forcible operation of 39, and the premium effect determined as the touch operation effect is performed by false detection based on the operation of the movable role member 39. Therefore, although the player is not expected to perform the touch operation while accepting the touch operation, the player can surprise the player by the forcible actuation of the movable character member 39 which is difficult for the player to anticipate, and thus, the interest in the game You can improve the interest.

  Furthermore, by using the false detection based on the forcible actuation of the movable role member 39, the premier effect is forcibly executed as the touch operation effect regardless of the player's intention, so that the selection rate is extremely selected at an angle. It is possible to prevent the execution of low premiere effects from being skipped (cancelled). As a result, when the premier effect which can not be seen rarely is determined as the touch operation effect, the premier effect can be reliably shown to the player.

  In addition, by utilizing the false detection based on the operation of the movable role member 39, it has never been known "a big hit finalization effect → premiere effect with forced operation of the movable role member 39" A shocking and interesting series of effects can be realized. This makes it possible to dramatically improve the interest and interest in gaming.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable combination member 39 is limited by not executing the process of starting the operation of the movable combination member 39 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. However, the method of limiting the operation of the movable part member 39 may be another method. For example, in the case of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable service member 39 is limited by not executing the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable service member 39. (E.g., the twelfth embodiment).

  Also, the premiere effect may be executed as a big hit fixed effect rather than a definite variation big hit fixed effect.

  Furthermore, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the forced operation flag may be set to ON in all the touch operation reception periods of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the first to fourth touches may be set. The forced operation flag may be set to ON in at least one touch operation reception period of the operation reception periods R1 to R4. In this case, it is preferable that the forced operation flag be set to ON in one or both of the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 has been described which includes the two movable part members of the main movable part member 39A and the sub movable part member 39B having the display portion 391B. Further, the sub movable service member 39B of the fourth embodiment described above is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B.

  In the above-described tenth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 including one movable service member 39, the operation start timing of the movable service member 39 (the movable service member operation effect during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 In the case where it is determined that the timing is the start timing, the case where the process of starting the operation of the movable combination member 39 (start of the movable combination member actuation effect) is not performed is described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes two movable service members (a main movable service member 39A and a sub movable service member 39B having a display portion 391B) similar to the fourth embodiment described above. In the touch operation reception period, the process of starting the operation of the main movable service member 39A is not performed, while the process of starting the operation of the sub movable service member 39B is performed. It is different from

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment.

[Movable work item operation process]
Here, FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable service member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the movable service member operation process of the present embodiment, the process of operating the main movable service member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of operating the movable service member 39 of the tenth embodiment described above ( Steps S4201 to S4206). Further, in the movable service member operation process of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the process of operating the sub movable service member 39B is executed in the same procedure as the above-described fourth embodiment. (Steps S4207 to S4210).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 74, in step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G2, G4, and G6 of the movable service member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of has been reached. Here, when the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A is reached (Step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S4202, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable service member 39 (Step S4201: No) ), The process proceeds to step S4205.

<Steps S4202 to S4204>
If it is the operation start timing of the main movable role member 39A (step S4201: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether it is in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202). Whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 It may be judged by operating a counter for judging whether or not. Here, when it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: No), the MPU 51 is a motor driver that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable role member 39A. An operation start signal is output to 39c (step S4203), and the movable service member operation processing is ended. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable service member 39A from the standby position to the operation position by controlling the first motor 39a1. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the main movable service member 39A (step S4204), and ends the movable service member operation processing.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (Step S4202: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable service member operation processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A is in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable service member 39A is started. The movable service member operation process is ended without performing the process. Thereby, the operation of the main movable service member 39A in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted.

<Steps S4205 to S4210>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable role member 39A (Step S4201: No), the MPU 51 drives the first motor 39a1 when it is the return timing of the main movable role member 39A (Step S4205: Yes) A return signal is output to the driver 39c (step S4206), and when it is the operation start timing of the sub movable role member 39B (step S4207: Yes), a second driving force is applied to the sub movable role member 39B An operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c for driving the motor 39a2 (step S4208), and when it is the return timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S4209: Yes), the drive is performed to the sub movable combination member 39B Drive the second motor 39a2 that applies And it outputs a return signal to the coater driver 39c (step S4210).

  Note that the MPU 51 is any of the operation start timing of the main movable combination member 39A, the return timing of the main movable combination member 39A, the operation start timing of the sub movable combination member 39B, and the return timing of the sub movable combination member 39B. If there is not (No at all of steps S4201, S4205, S4207, and S4209), the movable combination object operation process is ended. Also, when the operation start signal or the return signal is output to the motor driver 39c (steps S4206, S4208 or S4210), the movable service member operation process is ended.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are in progress, the main movable combination is not performed by executing the process of starting the operation of the main movable combination 39A. The operation of the member 39A is limited. As a result, based on the operation of the main movable service member 39A, it is prevented that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is erroneously detected.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the process of starting the operation of the sub movable combination member 39B is executed in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and the sub movable combination member 39B is executed. Operation is not restricted. Here, the sub movable service member 39B of the present embodiment is moved between the standby position and the operation position within a range not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, in the present embodiment, no erroneous detection occurs even if the sub movable role member 39B is operated. Therefore, the operation of the sub movable service member 39B is not limited, and the operation is not unnecessarily restricted to the operation of the sub movable service member 39B which does not cause a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable combination member operation effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest or interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are in progress, the main movable combination member 39A is not operated to start the operation of the main movable combination member 39A. Although limited, the method of limiting the operation of the main movable part member 39A may be other methods. For example, in the case of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable service member 39A is restricted by not executing the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable service member 39A. (See the twelfth embodiment described above).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub movable role member 39B includes the display portion 391B, but the sub movable role member 39B may not include the display portion 391B.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the main movable combination member actuation effect is limited in the reception periods R1 to R4, the execution of the main movable combination member actuation effect is suspended, and the suspended main movable combination member The operation effect may be performed after the end of the reception periods R1 to R4 or after the end of the touch operation effect (see the above-described eleventh embodiment).

Fifteenth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of the object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are turned on while the movable service member in operation flag is set to on. The case has been described where the detection result of the object at is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, the movable part is determined to be the operation start timing of the movable part member 39 (timing to start the movable part member activation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the movable combination member operation effect) is not performed is described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the touch operation reception period and the execution period of the movable combination member operation presentation overlap, the execution of the touch operation presentation is limited when the movable combination member activation presentation starts first. This is different from the first and tenth embodiments described above in that execution of the movable combination product actuation effect is limited when the touch operation reception period is started earlier.

  For example, when the movable combination product operation presentation is started earlier than the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable combination product is in operation as in the touch operation presentation execution process of the first embodiment described above. While the flag is set to ON, the detection results of the objects in the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited (see FIG. 37). Of course, in the present embodiment, the same configuration as that of the above-described second to ninth embodiments is adopted, and the touch operation effect execution processing similar to that of the above-described second to ninth embodiments is performed. The execution of the touch operation effect may be limited while the accessory member is operating.

  Further, when the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is started earlier than the movable combination member operation presentation, the movable combination member in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 as in the tenth embodiment described above. If it is determined that the operation start timing of 39 (the timing to start the movable combination member operation effect) is not performed processing to start the operation of the movable combination member 39 (start the movable combination member operation effect) Thus, the execution of the movable combination member operation presentation is limited (see FIG. 68). Of course, in the present embodiment, the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned eleventh to fourteenth embodiments is adopted, and the movable service member operation processing similar to that of the above-mentioned first to fourteenth embodiments is executed. It may be limited that the movable combination product operation presentation is performed during the touch operation reception period.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has an advantage in the case where the execution of the touch operation effect is limited during the operation of the movable role member, and a case where the execution of the movable object member actuation effect is restricted during the touch operation reception period. You can enjoy the benefits of That is, when the touch operation reception period and the execution period of the movable combination member operation production overlap, either when the movable combination member operation production is started first or when the touch operation reception period is started first. Even if it is, it is prevented that the touch operation effect is unnecessarily executed due to the false detection based on the operation of the movable service member 39.

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B has been described. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B can not detect the presence of an object in the operation area (the left area of the symbol display portion 341) of the sub movable role member 39B has been described. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display part is detected by the two main detection sensors except for the left area of the symbol display part. The second embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that a sub detection sensor for detecting the presence of an object in the front area of the left area of the symbol display unit is provided separately from the two main detection sensors. That is, in the present embodiment, the detection range in the symbol display unit is different between the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and the presence of the object is individually detected by each detection sensor. Then, when the movable combination member is not in operation and in the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by both the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and when the movable combination member is operated, the symbol is displayed only by the sub detection sensor. This embodiment is also different from the first embodiment described above in that the presence of an object in the front area of the left area of the part is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub movable service member 39B according to the fourth embodiment described above is not provided, and the movable service member corresponding to the main movable service member 39A is also provided. It differs from the embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, focusing on the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 75 is a front view schematically showing the detection range of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, 38D with respect to the symbol display portion 341 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a movable role member 39, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, and a sub detection sensor 38E.

  The movable part member 39 is a member similar to the movable part member 39 of the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above and the main movable part member 39A of the fourth embodiment described above, and the symbol display portion Between the first predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above 341 and the second operating position (see FIG. 5) set lower than the first standby position, the first motor 39a1 It is movable in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display portion 341 by the driving force from the above.

  The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are similar to the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 39B of the fourth embodiment described above, and the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A The presence of an object in the overlapping range of the second main detection sensor 38B and the second main detection sensor 38B is detected. The overlapping detection range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) is the front side of the symbol display portion 341 It is a central area excluding the left part (the operating area of the sub movable role member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part and the lower right part, and the touch operation in the operating area of the movable part member 39 can be detected.

  The sub detection sensor 38E is disposed to the left of the second main detection sensor 38B, and detects the presence of an object in the left area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. The detection range of the sub detection sensor 38E does not overlap with the overlapping detection range of the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the sub detection sensor 38E can detect a touch operation in the left side area of the operation area of the movable combination member 39 which can not be detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the detection range is shared by the first main detection sensor 38A, the second main detection sensor 38B, and the sub detection sensor 38E, and the central region within the working range of the movable combination member 39 and the movable combination member The presence or absence of a touch operation is individually detected in the left side area which is out of the operation range of 39.

  In the present embodiment, the touch operation state is determined based on the touch operation detection flag for three times by the same method as the first embodiment described above, and the touch operation states are the first to third touch operation pattern flags. Are stored in the RAM 412 as a combination of on and off (see FIG. 22B).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B can detect the operation of the movable combination member 39 when the movable combination member 39 is operating in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Based on the detection result of the sub detection sensor 38E which can not detect the operation of the movable combination member 39 without confirming the detection result, the presence or absence of the touch operation in the left side area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is determined. If the movable combination member 39 is not in operation during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B, and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. If the touch operation is not confirmed on the basis of the detection result in step S2, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined on the basis of the detection result of the sub detection sensor 38E.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are present (step S4301), and the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are present. (Step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S4302, and when it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (Step S4301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S4302>
If it is the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4301: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4302). The effect execution command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later. Whether or not the rendering execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 can be set such that the transmission completion flag is set to ON, for example, when the touch rendering execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later. It can be determined by checking whether the transmitted flag is set to ON. Note that it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started by determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S4301. However, if it is determined that the main touch operation start in the main touch operation state is started after the end of the touch operation effect (if it is determined that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341), the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be performed again on condition that it is a reception period.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S4302: YES), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: NO), the process is performed. It transfers to S4303.

<Step S4303>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable combination member operating flag indicating that the movable combination member is in operation is set to ON (step S4302: No). Step S4303). Here, when the movable combination member operating flag is set to on (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4307, and the movable combination member operating flag is set to off. In the case (step S4303: No), the process proceeds to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
When the movable combination product member operating flag is set to off (step S4303: No), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags with respect to the central region on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. It is determined whether a touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether an object is present in the central region on the front side of the symbol display portion 341) (step S4304). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S4306 and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not detect the touch operation. If it is determined that (step S4304: No), the process proceeds to step S4305.

<Step S4305>
When it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: No), the MPU 51 is a combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. Whether or not the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (whether an object is present in the left area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341) is determined based on the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4305). Here, when the sub detection sensor 38E determines that the touch operation is detected (step S4305: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S4306, and the sub detection sensor 38E determines that the touch operation is not detected. In the case (step S4305: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S4306>
When it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensor 38A, 38B or the sub detection sensor 38E (Yes in step S4304 or S4305), the MPU 41 determines the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of the command determination process. The touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to be executed is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4306), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S4307>
When the movable combination product member operating flag is set to ON (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left side area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. It is determined whether a touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (whether an object is present in the left area on the front side of the symbol display section 341) (step S4307). That is, when the movable combination product member operation flag is set to ON (when the movable combination product member 39 is in operation) (step S4303: Yes), the main detection sensors 38A and 38B touch the central region It is determined whether or not a touch operation on the left side area is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E without determining whether or not is detected.

  Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S4308 and determines that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. In the case (step S4307: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
When it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (Step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 determines an alternative touch operation effect determination process for determining an alternative touch operation effect to be performed in the left area of the symbol display portion 341. Are executed (step S4308). Then, the MPU 41 sets an alternative touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the alternative touch operation effect, and transmits the command to the display control device 6 (step S4308). Thereby, the alternative touch operation effect is performed in the left area of the symbol display portion 341. That is, in the left side region of the symbol display portion 341 where the movable combination member 39 in the activated position does not inhibit visual recognition when the movable combination member 39 is in operation in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. An alternative touch operation effect is performed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine in which the touch operation effect and the movable role member operation effect are executed, the touch operation effect may be performed by false detection by the movable role member 39 being operated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the movable combination member operating flag is set to ON (a stage where it is determined that the movable combination member 39 is operated (a movable combination member From the stage when the movable part member 39 is in the standby position) immediately before the operation of 39A is started, to the stage when the return of the movable part member 39 is confirmed and the mobile part member 39 is in the standby position) The detection of the touch operation by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E have different detection ranges, and the presence or absence of an object in each detection range is individually detected. Therefore, even if activation of the movable combination member 39 is started after the movable combination member activation flag is set to ON, it is possible to restrict that the touch operation effect is performed, and of course the movable combination member 39 is on standby It can also be limited that the touch operation effect is executed before returning to the position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is performed due to the operation of the movable combination member 39 being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the movable role member 39 is in the operating position, the left area of the symbol display portion 341 can be viewed by the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable combination member 39 is in operation in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, a touch operation is performed on the left side area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 In the left area of the symbol display portion 341, an alternative touch operation effect is executed. Thereby, even when the movable combination member 39 is operated, the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 can be effectively used to execute (alternate) touch operation effects, and the interest of the game is improved. Ru.

  The alternative touch operation effect may be to display an image to be displayed in the central region of the symbol display portion 341 as the touch operation effect in the left region of the symbol display portion 341, or completely different from the touch operation effect An image may be displayed.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a sub display is provided in the left area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, and a touch operation is accepted by the sub display, and a touch effect or alternative touch operation is performed by the sub display. An effect may be performed. In this case, even when the movable role member 39 is in operation, the execution of the touch effect on the sub display is not limited. Furthermore, the sub display may be provided on a movable (for example, left and right direction) movable part member in the left side area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable combination member 39 is operating in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not check the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. Although the execution of the touch operation effect due to the presence is limited, the object is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by ignoring the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B when the movable combination member 39 is operating. The execution of the touch operation effect due to the presence may be limited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E detect the presence of the object, while the movable combination member 39 is in the standby position. Although the presence of an object is detected only by the sub detection sensor 38E when it does not exist, it is detected by part of detection sensors of the main detection sensors 38A, 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E when other conditions (specific conditions) are satisfied. It is also conceivable to detect the presence of an object. For example, even if some of the two main detection sensors 38A, 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E are broken, the remaining detection sensors that are not broken may detect the presence of an object. In the operation check of the movable part member 39 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the movable part member 39 is individually activated by each of the two main detection sensors 38A, 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E. Can be checked to determine whether each detection sensor 38A, 38B, 38E has failed.

[Summary of the Invention]
The summary of the invention extracted from the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. In addition, in order to provide for understanding of the correspondence of each remark and each embodiment, the code etc. may be attached and explained for convenience, but the invention concerning the remark is limited to the concrete composition which attached the code. It is not a thing. Moreover, it is also possible to select and combine arbitrarily each structure and each processing function which are demonstrated below.

[Supplementary Note A0]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production restriction means for restricting the execution of one of the first and second effects during an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A0, execution of one of the first and second effects is restricted by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period. Therefore, when the detection means detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, there is a disadvantage that the first effect is executed due to the false detection that it is based on the operation of the player. This can be prevented from occurring.

[Supplementary Note A1]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, wherein the effect limiting device restricts the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A1, the execution of the first effect is limited by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period, whereby the operation of the movable combination member is erroneously detected as the player performing the touch operation. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being performed.

[Supplementary Note A2]
The effect limiting means is configured to detect the detection means (38a) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable part member (39) is operated to when the movable part member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when presence of an object is detected by 〜 38 d).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2, even if the detection means detects the presence of an object, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited, so the first effect can be falsely detected by the simple processing in the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Supplementary Note A3]
The effect limiting means is configured to detect the detection means (38a) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable part member (39) is operated to when the movable part member (39) returns to the first position. The game machine according to appendix A1, characterized in that execution of a process for confirming whether the presence of an object is detected or not is limited by 38 38 d).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A3, since the process of confirming whether the presence of an object is detected by the detection means is not executed in the specific period, the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted, so simple processing Can prevent the detection effect from being executed due to a false detection.

[Supplementary Note A4]
It further comprises driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable part member (39) between the first position and the second position,
The effect limiting means starts limiting the execution of the first effect during a period from when it is determined that the drive means (39a) is driven to when the drive means (39a) starts to drive. APPENDIX A1 The game machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3.

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A4, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the movable combination member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note A5]
When the movable part member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable part member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position It further comprises return detection means (39b),
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable role member (39) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4 characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A5, the restriction of the execution of the first effect is released when the return of the movable combination member is detected. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note A6]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The effect executing means (51) causes the determination result in the determination means (41) to shift the second effect to the special game state in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the executing period of the second effect overlap. When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when performing as an effect (big hit fixed effect, one-shot notification effect) that clearly indicates that the object is the predetermined area The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, wherein the game effect of the type according to the situation when the presence of an object is detected is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A6, when the effect of clearly indicating that the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state is executed in the overlapping period, if the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected, the predetermined area is detected. The game effect of the type according to the situation when the presence of the object is detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect in a situation where wake-up of the game is likely to occur throughout the game effect. As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, in a situation where it is difficult for the game to occur, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so it is possible to prevent the first effect from becoming meaningless.

[Supplementary Note A7]
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38 a to 38 d) in the overlapping period, the effect execution means (51) detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein an effect corresponding to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Supplementary Note A8]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in a notification game (fluctuation game) in which the player is notified of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed from the start of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the end of the basic effect, and the first development effect Including the second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
When the second development effect is being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect limiting means is for the first effect Restrict the execution,
The effect executing means (51) is
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, further comprising specific effect execution means for performing a specific effect different from the first effect when the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restriction means.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendix A7 and Appendix A8, an effect corresponding to the type of game effect being executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period is executed. For example, when the game effect performed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is performed. Therefore, even if the low expectation degree effect that the determination result is hardly expected to shift to the special game state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation degree effect is executed after the operation of the movable combination member As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A9]
The first effect executing means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period. The game machine according to appendix A8, wherein the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A9, the first effect is executed when the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed, even if the detecting means detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area in the overlapping period. The first effect is performed by the means. Therefore, at the timing where it is difficult to wake up even when the low expectation degree effect is executed, the first effect is executed as scheduled even if an object is detected in the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable combination member etc. It is possible to prevent the demeaning of the first effect while preventing the rise of

[Supplementary Note A10]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (a third touch operation reception period, a fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for clearly showing the player that the predetermined period is performed is performed,
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period, the effect execution means (51) executes the first effect by the effect restriction means The gaming machine according to Appendix A8 or A9, characterized in that the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect different from the first effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A10, when the detection means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), the execution restriction means restricts the execution of the first effect, and identification A special effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the movable combination product member operating, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution) Ru. Therefore, even if the low expectation degree effect that the determination result is hardly expected to shift to the special game state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation degree effect is executed after the operation of the movable combination member As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A11]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for clearly showing the player that the predetermined period is not performed is performed,
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that the first effect is executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A6 to A10.

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A11, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period even if the detection means detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area in the overlapping period. Therefore, even when an object is detected in the second predetermined period due to the operation of the movable combination member or the like at the timing where it is difficult to wake up even if the low expectation degree effect is executed, the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is possible to prevent the demeaning of the first effect while preventing the rise of the game.

[Supplementary Note A12]
The specific effect has a relatively high expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the special gaming state relatively to the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes A6 to A11, which is characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A12, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and thus after the actuation of the movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The wake of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A13]
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of Appendices A6 to A12 Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A13, since the specific effect is the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effectively performed than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest to a game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note A14]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the specific effect is the rare determination effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A14, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A15]
Second image display means (391B) different from the image display means (341);
The second movable provided with the second image display means (391B) which is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) by the effect execution means (51) Character part (39B),
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
And further
When the movable part member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B) Not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D)
When the second movable part member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B) Not detected by)
The first effect execution unit is configured to display the image when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection unit (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period). ) To execute the first effect (touch operation effect),
The effect limiting means does not restrict the execution of the first effect in the image display means (341) in a second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. The gaming machine according to claim A0.

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A15, in the second overlap period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not restricted by the effect restriction means. Therefore, even when the predetermined period for performing the first effect and the second predetermined period overlap with the execution period of the second effect, the first effect unnecessarily performed by the second image display means Is prevented from being performed. Thereby, since it can suppress that the execution frequency of a 1st presentation falls extremely, the fall of the fun of a game can be suppressed.

[Supplementary Note A16]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38A) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable part member (39A) is operated to when the movable part member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B), the execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A16, even if the detection means detects the presence of the object, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited, so the first effect is executed by a false detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Supplementary Note A17]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38A) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable part member (39A) is operated to when the movable part member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B) to limit execution of the process of confirming whether the presence of an object is detected or not.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A17, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted by the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection means. Thus, the first effect can be prevented from being executed.

[Supplementary Note A18]
It further comprises driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable part member (39A) between the first position and the second position,
The effect executing means (51) limits the execution of the first effect until it is determined that the driving means (39a) is driven and the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A17, characterized by starting.

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A18, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the movable combination member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent false detection in the first detection means by the operation of the movable part product member.

[Supplementary Note A19]
When the first movable part member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable part member (39A) returns from the second position to the first position. Further comprising return detection means (39b) for detecting
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable role member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A18, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A19, the restriction of the execution of the first effect is released when the return of the movable combination member is detected. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note A20]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the movable part member (39A) is in the second position is the image when the second movable part member (39B) is in the fourth position The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A19, characterized in that the coverage rate to the display means (341) is larger.

[Supplementary Note A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A20, wherein the movable combination members (39A) and the second movable combination members (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect.

[Supplementary Note A22]
It further comprises second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341),
The effect executing means (51) is
When the execution of the first effect in the image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means, a specific effect different from the first effect is performed in the second image display means (381B, 392C) The game machine according to appendix A0, further comprising specific effect execution means for causing

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A22, when execution of the first effect in the image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlapping period, the specific effect different from the first effect in the second image display means by the specific effect execution means Is executed. The specific effect is executed in the second image display means by the detection means detecting the presence of the object in the predetermined area based on the operation of the movable part member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by utilizing the false detection of the object in the detection means. As a result, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only can the first effect be executed but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case of

  In addition, since the specific effect is executed by the second image display means that the first effect is to be executed instead of the image display means, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, Not only what type (expected degree) of rendering is performed, but also by which image display means the rendering is performed can be noticed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Supplementary Note A23]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is relatively high that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A22.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A23, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and thus after the actuation of the movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The wake of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A24]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A22 or A23, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect which clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A24, since the specific effect is the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effectively performed than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest to a game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note A25]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A25, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A25, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the movable service member (39C).

[Supplementary Note A27]
A second movable service member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object is present in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A26, further comprising: the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable service member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary notes A26 and A27, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means provided on the movable combination member or the second movable combination member by utilizing the false detection of the object by the detection means. Ru. Thereby, when the movable combination member is in the second position in the predetermined period causing the false detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so that the operation of the movable combination member and the specific effect are combined. By doing this, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game compared to the case where the movable combination member is merely activated.

[Supplementary Note A28]
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable combination member (39A);
And further
The first effect execution means is configured to display the second image when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period). Let (391B) execute the first effect,
The effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B) in a second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap.
The effect executing means (51) is configured to send the first image display means (392B) to the first image display means (392B) when the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B) is restricted in the second overlapping period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

[Supplementary Note A29]
It further comprises a second movable service member (39B) which is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) and not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B). The gaming machine according to appendix A28, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable service member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A28 and A29, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means in the second overlapping period, the second image display means performs the first effect instead of executing the first effect. The third image display means executes a specific effect different from the first effect. Thereby, when the movable combination member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable combination member which the player does not expect, so what kind of type Not only whether the effect of (the degree of expectation) is performed but also can be focused on which image display means is used to perform the effect. Further, since the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable part product member, the operation of the movable part product member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable part product member is simply operated. The interest of the game can be significantly improved compared to the case of

[Supplementary Note A30]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect has a relatively high expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the special gaming state relatively to the first effect. The game machine according to Supplementary Note A28 or Supplementary Note A29.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A30, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and thus after the actuation of the movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The wake of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A31]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of Supplementary Notes A28 to A30 Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A31, since the specific effect is the determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effectively performed than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest to a game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note A32]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Appendix A31, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A32, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A33]
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable combination member (39A);
And further
The effect executing means (51) is replaced with the first effect when the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restricting means in the overlapping period. The second image display means (381B) causes the first specific effect to clearly indicate that it is the predetermined period, and the third image display means (392C) detects an object in the specific area in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect.

[Supplementary Note A34]
It further comprises a second movable service member (39B) moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B),
The gaming machine according to appendix A33, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable service member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A34, when the execution of the first effect in the image display means is restricted in the overlapping period by the effect restriction means, the first specific effect is executed in the second image display means instead of the first effect. And the second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect is executed by the third image display means on condition that the presence of the object in the specific area is detected. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case where the execution of the first effect is simply limited. Further, when the movable combination member is in the first position in the overlapping period, the second specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable combination member. By combining the two specific effects, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the movable role is simply activated.

[Supplementary Note A35]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The second specific effect has a relatively high expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special gaming state, as compared to the first effect. APPENDIX A33 or the game machine according to Appendix A34.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A35, the second specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, as compared to the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled, after operation of the movable combination member For the game at the beginning of the game, the wake-up to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A36]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The game according to Supplementary Note A33 or A34, wherein the second specified effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A36, since the second specific effect is the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note A37]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A36, wherein the second specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A37, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A38]
The movable part member (39) is movable between the first position and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position,
The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means enables execution of the first effect when the movable service member (39) is in the intermediate position in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A38, while the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable service member is in the second position in the predetermined period, the first effect when the movable service member is in the middle position. Execution of is not restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to the operation of the movable combination member being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player, and the movable combination member is at the intermediate position It is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect from being unnecessarily restricted when the

[Supplementary Note A 39]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the detection means (38) when the movable service member is in the second position during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A38, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the one effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A39, when the movable combination product member is in the second position in the predetermined period, and the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit, the specific effect execution unit performs the first effect And perform a specific effect different from. That is, the specific effect is performed using the false detection of the object by the detection means. As described above, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only can the first effect be executed but also the execution of the first effect is restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case where it is played.

[Supplementary Note A40]
The movable role member (39) further comprises a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to attachment A39, wherein the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when the execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A40, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means different from the image display means, not the image display means to be subjected to the first effect. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means which the player does not expect, and not only what type (expected degree) of effect is executed, but the effect is executed in which image display means It can also be paid attention to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Supplementary Note A41]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is relatively high that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A39 or Supplementary note A40.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A41, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and after the operation of the first movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled. For the game at the beginning of the game, the wake-up to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A42]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A39 or A40, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determining means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A42, since the specific effect is the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the operation of the first movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note A43]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A42, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A43, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note A44]
The detection means (38)
It is not detected that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable part member (39) is at the intermediate position.
Appendices A38 to A43 to detect that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable combination product (39) is at the second position. The gaming machine according to any of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A44, the presence of an object by the detecting means in a predetermined period is prevented while preventing the first effect from being executed due to a false detection when the movable service member (39) is at the intermediate position. When it is detected, the first effect can be performed.

[Supplementary Note A45]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the movable combination member (39) is operated to the second position and the movement combination member (39) is returned to the second position, the effect limiting means is The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A45, even if the detection means detects the presence of an object, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited, so the first effect is executed by a false detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Supplementary Note A46]
The effect limiting means is configured to detect the detection means (38) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable part member (39) to when the movable part member (39) returns to the first position. The game machine according to appendix A38, wherein execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A46, the processing of confirming whether the presence of an object is detected by the detection means is not executed, so that the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be limited, so false detection by the simple processing Thus, the first effect can be prevented from being executed.

[Supplementary Note A47]
It further comprises driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable part member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position and the second position,
The effect limiting means determines that the driving means (39a) is driven to move the movable part member (39) from the first position to the second position, and then the driving means (39a) The gaming machine according to Appendix A45 or Appendix A46, wherein the restriction of the execution of the first effect is started before the driving of the first stage is started.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A47, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the movable combination member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note A48]
When the movable part member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable part member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position It further comprises return detection means (39b),
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable role member (39) has returned to the second position. The game machine according to Supplementary Note A45 or Supplementary note A46, which is characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A48, when the return of the movable combination member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note A49]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, wherein the effect restricting means restricts the execution of the second effect during the overlapping period.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A49, since execution of the second effect can be limited in a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has performed an operation on the image display means based on the operation of the movable role member. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed due to the above.

[Supplementary Note A50]
The game according to appendix A49, wherein, when it is determined that the effect limiting means is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, execution of the process to start the second effect is limited. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A50, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by restricting the execution of the process to start the second effect. Because the execution of can be limited, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed by a false detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note A51]
The second effect executing means is characterized in that, when the timing to start the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A50.

[Supplementary Note A52]
The gaming machine according to appendix A51, wherein a point in time when the predetermined period of time has passed is an end point of time of the predetermined period of time.

[Supplementary Note A53]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A51 or A52, wherein the point in time when the predetermined period has elapsed is the point in time when the first effect is ended when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendices A51 to A53, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, when a fixed period has passed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect, while preventing the false detection that the operation on the image display means has been performed by the operation of the movable combination product. After the end, the second effect which is generally executed as the effect with a high degree of expectation can be executed to suppress the decrease in the interest or interest in the game.

[Supplementary Note A54]
The gaming machine according to attachment A49, wherein the effect executing means (51) limits execution of a process of confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A54, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note A55]
In the first effect, a normal effect having a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) are lower than the normal effect, the judging means (41 Including a rare effect (premium effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result in is to be transferred to the special game state,
The second effect execution means is configured to execute the first effect by the first effect means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be performed as the effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) performs the process until the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of an object in a predetermined area is not detected, the second judgment is made to shift the second effect to the special game state by the forcible operation of the movable role member (39) before the elapse of the predetermined period. Execute as an effect that clearly indicates that there is
The first effect executing means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forcible operation of the movable part member (39) by the detecting means (38a to 38d) to detect the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the rare effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A55, when it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced operation time elapses. If the presence of is detected, the movable service member is forcibly activated before the predetermined time has elapsed. Since the player can be surprised or shocked by the forced operation of the movable character member that the player does not expect, the interest and interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the detection effect is executed by utilizing the erroneous detection by the forcible actuation of the movable role member, so that the player can be made to surely see the first effect. And, in the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A55, since the rare effect specifying that the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state is executed as the first effect, the rare effect is caused by the false detection due to the operation of the movable combination member. By being executed, when a rare effect which can not be seen rarely is determined as a detection effect, not only can the rare effect be reliably shown to the player, but also an unexpected movable role member In addition to the operation of the player, the rare rendition can be performed to give the player a further surprise or shock. Thereby, the interest and interest of the game can be further improved.

[Supplementary Note A56]
It further comprises a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the game state between a notification game state in which a notification game of notifying the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is executed, and the special game state,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the first special game is executed, and a second special game state (5R certain variation jackpot state in which the second special game is performed, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and
The notification game state includes a first notification game state, and a second notification game state that has a high probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the determination means (41) than the first notification game state. ,
The gaming state transition means (41) causes transition to the first notification game state after the end of the first special game, and transition to the second notification game state after the end of the second special game,
An effect that indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the second special game state by the game state transition means (41) after the end of the notification game. The gaming machine according to appendix A55, which is characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A56, it is an effect that clearly indicates that the rare effect is to shift the determination result of the determining means to the (second) special gaming state ((probable change) jackpot gaming state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the game is to be shifted to the (second) special gaming state ((probable change) jackpot gaming state) by false detection due to the forced operation of the movable role member. Thereby, the player can know that the determination result is advantageous before the end of the notification game when the rare effect is executed after the forcible actuation of the movable combination member, and thus the interest or interest in the game Can be improved.

[Supplementary Note A57]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A55 or A56, wherein the effect limiting device restricts the execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A57, when the first effect is not a rare effect, the effect restricting means restricts the execution of the second effect in the overlapping period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will by false detection based on the operation of the movable role member.

[Supplementary Note A58]
The detection means (38a to 38) are moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position), and are moved between the third position and the fourth position. Further comprising a second movable part member (39B) not detected by 38d),
The second effect execution means executes a second effect (movable combination member operation effect) for moving the second movable combination member (39B) between the third position and the fourth position,
The effect limiting means is capable of restricting the execution of the second effect by the movable role member (39A) performed by the second effect executing means in the overlapping period, and the second movable object member ( The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein execution of the second effect according to 39B) is not limited.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A58, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable service member can be limited in a predetermined period, the predetermined region on the front side of the image display means based on the operation of the first movable service member It is prevented that the player's operation is erroneously detected.

  Further, when the second movable service member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detection means. Therefore, since the erroneous detection in the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable part member, it is possible to prevent the unnecessary restriction of the operation of the second movable part member which does not generate the erroneous detection. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable combination effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a drop in interest or interest in the game.

[Supplementary Note A59]
When the effect limiting means determines that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable combination member during the predetermined period, the execution restriction of the first movable combination member is limited. The gaming machine according to appendix A58, which is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A59, processing of starting operation of the first movable service member even when it is determined that it is timing to start the second effect by the first movable service member in a predetermined period Since the execution of the first movable combination effect in a predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect by false detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note A60]
When the timing to start the first movable combination effect is the predetermined period, the effect restriction means causes the second movable combination member to receive the second predetermined period after the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A59, characterized in that an effect is executed.

[Supplementary Note A61]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein a point in time when the predetermined period of time has passed is an end point of time of the predetermined period of time.

[Supplementary Note A62]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end time of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendices A60 to A62, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable combination member in a predetermined period, the first of the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. 1 The second effect by the movable role member is executed. Therefore, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first period, while preventing the false detection that the operation on the image display means is performed by the operation of the first movable combination product member After the end of the effect, the second effect by the first movable role member, which is generally executed as an effect having a high degree of expectation, can be executed, thereby suppressing a drop in interest or interest in the game.

[Supplementary Note A63]
The effect limiting means limits execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the second effect by the first movable service member in the predetermined period, as described in appendix A58. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A63, execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is performed by restricting execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable combination member in the predetermined period. Can be limited, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note A64]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable part member (39A) is in the second position is the coverage when the second movable part member (39B) is in the fourth position The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A58 to A63, characterized in that the coverage rate with respect to the image display means (341) is larger.

[Supplementary Note A65]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices A58 to A64, wherein the first movable combination member (39A) and the second movable combination member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect. .

[Supplementary Note A66]
The effect limiting means can limit the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period, and when the execution period starts earlier than the overlapping period. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein execution of the first effect can be restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A66, when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period, the execution of the second effect is restricted, thereby detecting that the object is present in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable service member. It is prevented that the means erroneously detects, and the execution of the first effect is restricted when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, whereby the object is placed in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable service member. It is prevented that the detection means erroneously detects the presence. Therefore, in the case where the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the operation of the movable service member is either when the predetermined period starts first or when the execution period starts first. False detection based on false detection can be prevented, and unnecessary effects of the detection effect can be prevented based on the false detection.

[Supplementary Note B1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Determining means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
In the overlap period where the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, an effect that indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state in the second effect (( When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the case of performing the jackpot determination effect or one-shot notification effect), the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected A game machine characterized in that the game effect of the type according to the situation of the case is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B1, in the case where the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected in the case of executing an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state in the overlapping period, The game effect of the type according to the situation when the presence of the object is detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect in a situation where wake-up of the game is likely to occur throughout the game effect. As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, in a situation where it is difficult for the game to occur, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so it is possible to prevent the first effect from becoming meaningless.

[Supplementary Note B2]
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38 a to 38 d) in the overlapping period, the effect execution means (51) detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area The game machine according to Supplementary Note B1, wherein an effect corresponding to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Supplementary Note B3]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in a notification game (fluctuation game) in which the player is notified of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed from the start of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the end of the basic effect, and the first development effect Including the second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The effect executing means (51) is
When the second development effect is being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect restriction for restricting the execution of the first effect Means,
Specific effect execution means for causing a specific effect different from the first effect to be executed when the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restriction means;
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2 and Appendix B3, an effect corresponding to the type of game effect being executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period is executed. For example, when the game effect performed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is performed. Therefore, even if the low expectation degree effect that the determination result is hardly expected to shift to the special game state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation degree effect is executed after the operation of the movable combination member As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note B4]
The first effect executing means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period. The game machine according to appendix B3, wherein the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B4, the first effect is executed when the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed, even when the detecting means detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area in the overlapping period. The first effect is performed by the means. Therefore, at the timing where it is difficult to wake up even when the low expectation degree effect is executed, the first effect is executed as scheduled even if an object is detected in the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable combination member etc. It is possible to prevent the demeaning of the first effect while preventing the rise of

[Supplementary Note B5]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (a third touch operation reception period, a fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for clearly showing the player that the predetermined period is performed is performed,
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period, the effect execution means (51) executes the first effect by the effect restriction means The gaming machine according to Appendix B3 or Appendix B4, characterized in that the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect different from the first effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, when the detection means detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), the execution restriction means restricts the execution of the first effect, and the identification A special effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the movable combination product member operating, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution) Ru. Therefore, even if the low expectation degree effect that the determination result is hardly expected to shift to the special game state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation degree effect is executed after the operation of the movable combination member As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note B6]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for clearly showing the player that the predetermined period is not performed is performed,
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that the first effect is executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B5.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, even when the detection means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area in the overlapping period, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period. Therefore, even when an object is detected in the second predetermined period due to the operation of the movable combination member or the like at the timing where it is difficult to wake up even if the low expectation degree effect is executed, the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is possible to prevent the demeaning of the first effect while preventing the rise of the game.

[Supplementary Note B7]
The specific effect has a relatively high expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the special gaming state relatively to the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B6, which is characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B7, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and thus after the activation of the movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled. The wake of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note B8]
The specific effect is a confirmed effect which clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of the additional notes B1 to B7 Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B8, since the specific effect is the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effectively performed than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest to a game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note B9]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to appendix B8, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B9, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix C1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Determining means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
A gaming state transition means (41) for transitioning the gaming state between a notification gaming state in which a notification game for notifying a determination result by the determination means (41) is executed and the special gaming state;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
The first effect execution means is provided to execute a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). ,
The determination result in the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state by moving the movable part member (39) from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period. When the expectation degree improvement effect (chance up effect) for improving the degree of expectation of the game is executed, the expectation degree improvement effect is executed so that the movable combination in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). When the presence of a member is detected, it is possible to execute a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C1, when the presence of the movable combination member in the predetermined area is detected by execution of the expectation improvement effect that the movable combination member is operated, the fixed effect can be executed. It is. That is, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the operation of the movable part member, even if it is erroneously detected as the action of the player by the player, The fixed effect is performed using the false detection. That is, it solves the problem that wake-up may occur due to the execution of the first effect with low expectation of being transferred to the special game state after activation of the movable role member, by utilizing false detection for the opposite hand be able to.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) executes the determined effect when the predetermined effect is executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix C3]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in a notification game (fluctuation game) in which the player is notified of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed from the start of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the end of the basic effect, and the first development effect Including the second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the predetermined effect is the second development effect.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendix C2 and Appendix C3, when the detection means detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area during the predetermined period, the fixed effect is performed when the predetermined effect (for example, the second development effect) is being executed. It can be done. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the movable combination product member operating, the fixed effect may be performed while the predetermined effect such as the second development effect is being performed. Therefore, even if the low expectation degree effect that the determination result is hardly expected to shift to the special game state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation degree effect is executed after the operation of the movable combination member As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (a third touch operation reception period, a fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for clearly showing the player that the predetermined period is performed is performed,
The effect executing means (51) can execute the fixed effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices C1 to C3, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C4, the fixed effect may be performed when the detection means detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area in the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution). That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the movable combination product member operating, the fixed effect may be performed in the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution). Therefore, even if the low expectation degree effect that the determination result is hardly expected to shift to the special game state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation degree effect is executed after the operation of the movable combination member As a result, the wake of the game is prevented, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The determined effect is an effect to be executed after the movable combination member (39) returns to the first position, and from the first position to the second position of the movable combination member (39). The game machine according to any one of Appendices C1 to C4, characterized in that the effect is accompanied by movement (decision effect B).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C5, after the actuation of the movable combination member is finished, a rendition accompanied by the actuation of the movable combination is executed as the determined effect. That is, the finalized effect is executed as the second active role member operation effect of the movable role member operation effect performed continuously. Therefore, the fixed effect is executed as an unexpected effect. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable combination member is operated again after the return of the movable combination member. As a result, since the player can continue to be interested in the effect even after the end of the movable role product effect, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C6]
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the first special game is executed, and a second special game state (5R certain variation jackpot state in which the second special game is performed, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and
The effect executing means (51) is configured to move the movable combination member (39) from the first position when the expectation improvement effect is performed by moving the movable combination member (39). When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in response to the movement to the second position, the determination result in the determination means (41) is the second special game state The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C5, wherein the determined effect is executed on condition that the game is to be shifted to

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C6, the fixed effect is executed on condition that the determination result is to shift to a second special game state in which a second special game which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. Be done. For example, the second special game state to be shifted after the end of the special game to the second notification game in which the probability that the determination result is determined to shift to the special game state by the determination means is higher than the first notification game The fixed effect is executed on the condition that Therefore, when the determined effect is executed when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the fact that the movable combination member is operated, the determination result is the first special game state Since it can be known that the player is to shift to the second special game state advantageous to the player, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices C1 to C6, wherein the determined effect is the rare determined effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C7, since the determined effect is a rare determined effect, it can be easily known that the determination result is to shift to a second special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state Can improve the fun of the game.

[Supplementary Note D1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
A first movable service member (39A) moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position);
A second movable service member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operation position) and provided with the second image display means (391B);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable role member (39A) and the second movable role member (39B) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
When the first movable part member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the first detection means (38A) , 38B) and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable part member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the first detection means (38A) , 38B), and
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) in a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), and in the second predetermined period (touch operation reception period) A first effect execution unit that causes the first image display unit (341) to execute a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the area is detected by the second detection unit (38C, 38D) ,
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the first movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In the first overlap period where the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted, and the second predetermined period and the second predetermined period Effect limiting means for not restricting the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) in a second overlapping period in which the second effect is performed and overlapping the execution period of the second effect;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, in the first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the effect restriction means restricts the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect. Be done. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, the first effect is executed due to the false detection that it is based on the operation of the player. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences. On the other hand, in the effect limiting means, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not restricted in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even when the predetermined period for performing the first effect (the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period) and the execution period for the second effect overlap, the second image display means unnecessarily. The execution of the first effect to be performed is prevented. Thereby, since it can suppress that the execution frequency of a 1st presentation falls extremely, the fall of the fun of a game can be suppressed.

[Supplementary Note D2]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the first movable service member (39A) is operated, to when the first movable service member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting unit performs the process. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, even when the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited, so the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process. It can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix D3]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the first movable service member (39A) is operated, to when the first movable service member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting unit performs the process. The gaming machine according to appendix D1, characterized in that execution of processing for confirming whether the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, the process of confirming whether the presence of the object is detected by the first detection means is not executed, so that the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be limited, so that the process can be simplified. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection.

[Appendix D4]
It further comprises driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the first movable part member (39A) between the first position and the second position,
The effect executing means (51) limits the execution of the first effect until it is determined that the driving means (39a) is driven and the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, characterized by starting.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the first movable service member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection in the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable service member.

[Appendix D5]
When the first movable part member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable part member (39A) returns from the second position to the first position. Further comprising return detection means (39b) for detecting
The effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the first movable role member (39A) is returning to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, when the return of the first movable service member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection in the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable service member.

[Appendix D6]
The coverage with respect to the first image display means (341) when the first movable part member (39A) is in the second position is that the second movable part member (39B) is in the fourth position The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D5, characterized in that it is larger than the coverage for the first image display means (341) in the case.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices D1 to D6, wherein the first movable combination member (39A) and the second movable combination member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect .

[Supplementary Note E1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341);
Detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) for detecting an object when it is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
The detecting means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 32A, 32A, 32A, 32A> when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position) Moveable part members (39A, 39C) detected by 38B);
Effect executing means (51) for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B, 392C) and the movable combination members (39A, 39C) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period), a first effect (the first image display means (341)) First effect executing means for executing touch operation effect);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable role member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39, 39C) between the first position and the second position;
Effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
When the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means, a specific effect different from the first effect is the second image display means (381B, 392C) Specific effect execution means to be executed by the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix E1, the execution of the first effect in the first image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlapping period. Therefore, when the detection means detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, there is a disadvantage that the first effect is executed due to the false detection that it is based on the operation of the player. This can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when execution of the first effect in the first image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlapping period, the specific effect different from the first effect is executed in the second image display means by the specific effect execution means . The specific effect is executed in the second image display means by the detection means detecting the presence of the object in the predetermined area based on the operation of the movable part member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by utilizing the false detection of the object in the detection means. As a result, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only can the first effect be executed but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case of

  In addition, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means which the player does not expect by the execution of the specific effect in the second image display means instead of the first image display means in which the first effect is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to what type (expected degree) of effect is executed, but also to which image display means is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix E2]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is relatively high that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix E1.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note E2, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and after the operation of the first movable service member, as compared with the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled. For the game at the beginning of the game, the wake-up to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note E3]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, wherein the specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note E3, by the specific effect being the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the operation of the first movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note E4]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E3, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note E4, the specific effect is a rare determined effect, and the wake-up for the game after the operation of the first movable role member is further increased as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest to the game is further effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note E5]
The game machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that the second image display means (391C) is provided on the first movable service member (39C).

[Supplementary Note E6]
A second movable service member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object is present in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B);
The game machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, further comprising: the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable service member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, the special effect is executed in the second image display means provided on the movable combination member or the second movable combination member by utilizing the false detection of the object by the detection unit. Ru. Thereby, when the movable combination member is in the second position in the predetermined period causing the false detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so that the operation of the movable combination member and the specific effect are combined. By doing this, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game compared to the case where the movable combination member is merely activated.

[Supplementary Note F1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
The first detection means (38A, 38B) when moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuated position) and moved between the first position and the second position A movable part member (39A) detected by the
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable combination member (39A);
Effect execution that causes the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable combination member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game Means (51),
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) during a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect is displayed on the first image display means (341). And the second image display means (391B) performs the second operation when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period). (1) first effect executing means for executing the effect;
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In the first overlap period where the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted, and the second predetermined period and the second predetermined period Effect restriction means for restricting the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B) in a second overlap period in which the second effect execution period overlaps;
When restricting the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B) in the second overlapping period, the third image display means (392B) is made to execute a specific effect different from the first effect Specific effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Supplementary Note F2]
The second movable service member (39B) moved between the third position (the second standby position) and the fourth position (the second operation position) and not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided to the second movable service member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary notes F1 and F2, the effect limiting means can limit the execution of the first effect in the first image display means in the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. It is. Therefore, when the first detection means detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, the first effect is performed due to the false detection that it is based on the operation of the player. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection unit during the second overlapping period, the third image display unit performs the first effect instead of executing the first effect in the second image display unit. A specific effect different from the effect is executed. Thereby, when the movable combination member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable combination member which the player does not expect, so what kind of type Not only whether the effect of (the degree of expectation) is performed but also can be focused on which image display means is used to perform the effect. Further, since the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable part product member, the operation of the movable part product member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable part product member is simply operated. The interest of the game can be significantly improved compared to the case of

[Supplementary Note F3]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect has a relatively high expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the special gaming state relatively to the first effect. The game machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2 which is characterized by the present invention.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note F3, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and therefore, after the operation of the movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled. The wake of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note F4]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F3 Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note F4, the specific effect is the determined effect, and the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is made more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest to a game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note F5]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note F5, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix G1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
The first detection means (when moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operated position) and moved between the first position and the second position) A movable part member (39A) detected by 38A, 38B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable combination member (39A);
Effect execution that causes the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable combination member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game Means (51),
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38A, 38B) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), a first effect (touch operation effect) is displayed on the first image display means (341) First effect executing means for executing
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
When execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlapping period, the second image display means (381B) is used instead of the first effect. The first specific effect specifying the predetermined period is executed, and the third image display means (392C) performs the first effect and the first specification when an object is detected in the specific area in the predetermined period. Specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect different from the effect;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix G2]
The second movable service member (39B) moved between the third position (the second standby position) and the fourth position (the second operation position) and not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) Equipped
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable service member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary notes G1 and G2, the execution of the first effect in the first image display means is restricted in the overlapping period by the effect restriction means. Therefore, when the first detection means detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, the first effect is performed due to the false detection that it is based on the operation of the player. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when execution of the first effect in the first image display means is restricted in the overlapping period by the effect restriction means, instead of the first effect, the first specific effect is executed in the second image display means, and the specific A second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect is executed by the third image display means on condition that the presence of the object in the area is detected. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case where the execution of the first effect is simply limited. Further, when the movable combination member is in the first position in the overlapping period, the second specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable combination member. By combining the two specific effects, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the movable role is simply activated.

[Appendix G3]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The second specific effect has a relatively high expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special gaming state, as compared to the first effect. The game machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or Supplementary Note G2 characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G3, the second specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and after the operation of the movable combination member, as compared to the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled. For the game at the beginning of the game, the wake-up to the game is effectively prevented and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix G4]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The game according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2 characterized in that the second specified effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G4, since the second specific effect is the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the actuation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix G5]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Appendix G4, wherein the second specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G5, since the specific effect is a rare determined effect, the wake-up for the game after the activation of the movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is more effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note H1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position), a second position (operating position), and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and the first position and the second position A movable part member (39) detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when being moved between them;
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
A second effect (movable combination member operation effect) for moving the movable combination member (39) between the first position, the second position, the first position, and the second position Effect execution means,
In the predetermined period, when the movable combination member (39) is at the second position, the execution of the first effect is limited, and when the movable combination member (39) is at the intermediate position, 1 production restriction means that enables the execution of one production,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H1, while the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable service member is in the second position in a predetermined period, the first effect when the movable service member is in the middle position Execution of is not restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to the operation of the movable combination member being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player, and the movable combination member is at the intermediate position It is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect from being unnecessarily restricted when the

[Supplementary Note H2]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the detection means (38) when the movable service member is in the second position during the predetermined period. H. 1 The gaming machine according to appendix H1, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H2, when the movable object member is in the second position in the predetermined period and the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means, the specific effect executing means performs the first effect And perform a specific effect different from. That is, the specific effect is performed using the false detection of the object by the detection means. As described above, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only can the first effect be executed but also the execution of the first effect is restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case where it is played.

[Supplementary Note H3]
The movable role member (39) further comprises a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The game machine according to appendix H2, wherein the specific effect execution means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when the execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H3, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means different from the image display means, not the image display means to be subjected to the first effect. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means which the player does not expect, and not only what type (expected degree) of effect is executed, but the effect is executed in which image display means It can also be paid attention to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Supplementary Note H4]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is relatively high that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to Appendix H2 or Appendix H3.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H4, the specific effect is expected to be relatively higher than the first effect, and thus after the activation of the movable combination member, as compared with the case where the first effect is performed as scheduled. The wake of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note H5]
The game machine further comprises determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition.
The game machine according to appendix H2 or H3, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect which clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H5, by the specific effect being the determined effect, the wakeup for the game after the operation of the first movable combination member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest to the game is improved more effectively.

[Supplementary Note H6]
The determined effect is a normal determined effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare determined effect having a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect (premium effect Including) and
The gaming machine according to Appendix H5, wherein the specific effect is the rare effect effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H6, the specific effect is a rare determined effect, and the wake-up for the game after the operation of the first movable role member is further increased as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest to the game is further effectively improved.

[Supplementary Note H7]
The detection means (38)
It is not detected that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable part member (39) is at the intermediate position.
It is detected that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable combination product (39) is in the second position. The gaming machine according to any of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, the presence of an object by the detection means in a predetermined period is prevented while preventing the first effect from being executed due to a false detection when the movable service member (39) is at the intermediate position. When it is detected, the first effect can be performed.

[Supplementary Note H8]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the movable combination member (39) is operated to the second position and the movement combination member (39) is returned to the second position, the effect limiting means is The game machine according to appendix H1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H8, even if the detection means detects the presence of the object, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted, so the first effect is executed by a false detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Supplementary Note H9]
The effect limiting means is configured to detect the detection means (38) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable part member (39) to when the movable part member (39) returns to the first position. H. The gaming machine according to appendix H1, which restricts execution of a process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H9, since the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted by the execution of the process of confirming whether the presence of the object is detected by the detection means, false detection by the simple process Thus, the first effect can be prevented from being executed.

[Supplementary Note H10]
It further comprises driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable part member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position and the second position,
The effect limiting means determines that the driving means (39a) is driven to move the movable part member (39) from the first position to the second position, and then the driving means (39a) The game machine according to appendix H8 or H9, wherein the restriction of the execution of the first effect is started until the driving of the first stage is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the movable combination member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note H11]
When the movable part member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable part member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position It further comprises return detection means (39b),
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable role member (39) has returned to the second position. The game machine according to Supplementary Note H8 or Supplementary Note H9, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11, the restriction of the execution of the first effect is released when the return of the movable combination member is detected. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Supplementary Note I1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the second effect in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I1, since execution of the second effect can be restricted in a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has performed an operation on the image display means based on the operation of the movable role member. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed due to the above.

[Supplementary Note I2]
The game according to appendix I1, wherein the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the process for starting the second effect when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I2, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by restricting the execution of the process to start the second effect. Because the execution of can be limited, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed by a false detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note I3]
The second effect executing means is characterized in that, when the timing to start the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix I2.

[Supplementary Note I4]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein a point in time when the predetermined period of time has passed is an end point of time of the predetermined period of time.

[Supplementary Note I5]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3 or I14, wherein the point in time when the fixed period has elapsed is the point in time when the first effect is ended when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendices I3 to I5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, when a fixed period has passed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect, while preventing the false detection that the operation on the image display means has been performed by the operation of the movable combination product. After the end, the second effect which is generally executed as the effect with a high degree of expectation can be executed to suppress the decrease in the interest or interest in the game.

[Supplementary Note I6]
The game machine according to appendix I1, wherein the effect executing means (51) limits execution of a process of confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note J1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Determining means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
In the first effect, a normal effect having a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) are lower than the normal effect, the judging means (41 Including a rare effect (premium effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result in is to be transferred to the special game state,
The second effect execution means is configured to execute the first effect by the first effect means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be performed as the effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) performs the process until the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of an object in a predetermined area is not detected, the second judgment is made to shift the second effect to the special game state by the forcible operation of the movable role member (39) before the elapse of the predetermined period. Execute as an effect that clearly indicates that there is
The first effect executing means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forcible operation of the movable part member (39) by the detecting means (38a to 38d) to detect the first effect. A game machine characterized by executing the rare effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note J1, when it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced operation time elapses. If the presence of is detected, the movable service member is forcibly activated before the predetermined time has elapsed. Since the player can be surprised or shocked by the forced operation of the movable character member that the player does not expect, the interest and interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the detection effect is executed by utilizing the erroneous detection by the forcible actuation of the movable role member, so that the player can be made to surely see the first effect. And, in the gaming machine according to the supplementary note J1, since the rare effect of clearly indicating that the determination result is to shift to the special game state is executed as the first effect, the rare effect is caused by the false detection due to the operation of the movable combination member. By being executed, when a rare effect which can not be seen rarely is determined as a detection effect, not only can the rare effect be reliably shown to the player, but also an unexpected movable role member In addition to the operation of the player, the rare rendition can be performed to give the player a further surprise or shock. Thereby, the interest and interest of the game can be further improved.

[Supplementary Note J2]
It further comprises a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the game state between a notification game state in which a notification game of notifying the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is executed, and the special game state,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the first special game is executed, and a second special game state (5R certain variation jackpot state in which the second special game is performed, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and
The notification game state includes a first notification game state, and a second notification game state that has a high probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the determination means (41) than the first notification game state. ,
The gaming state transition means (41) causes transition to the first notification game state after the end of the first special game, and transition to the second notification game state after the end of the second special game,
An effect that indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the second special game state by the game state transition means (41) after the end of the notification game. The gaming machine according to appendix J1, which is characterized in that

  The gaming machine according to appendix J2 is an effect that clearly indicates that the rare effect is to shift the determination result of the determining means to the (second) special gaming state ((probable change) jackpot gaming state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the game is to be shifted to the (second) special gaming state ((probable change) jackpot gaming state) by false detection due to the forced operation of the movable role member. Thereby, the player can know that the determination result is advantageous before the end of the notification game when the rare effect is executed after the forcible actuation of the movable combination member, and thus the interest or interest in the game Can be improved.

[Supplementary Note J3]
The game machine according to appendix J1 or J2, wherein the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect limiting means when the first effect is not a rare effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will by false detection based on the operation of the movable role member.

[Supplementary Note K1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
The detection means (38a to 38) are moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first actuated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A first movable part member (39A) detected by 38d);
The detection means (38a to 38) are moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position), and are moved between the third position and the fourth position. A second movable part (39B) not detected by 38d);
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable role member (39A) and the second movable role member (39B) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
The first movable service member (39A) is moved between the first position and the second position, or the second movable service member (39B) is moved between the third position and the fourth position. Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable combination member operation effect) for moving between the second effect;
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the second effect by the first movable service member (39A) performed by the second effect executing means can be restricted Effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the second effect by the second movable role member (39B);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note K1, the execution of the second effect by the first movable combination member can be limited in a predetermined period, so the predetermined region on the front side of the image display means based on the operation of the first movable combination member It is prevented that the player's operation is erroneously detected.

  Further, when the second movable service member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detection means. Therefore, since the erroneous detection in the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable part member, it is possible to prevent the unnecessary restriction of the operation of the second movable part member which does not generate the erroneous detection. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable combination effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a drop in interest or interest in the game.

[Supplementary Note K2]
When the effect limiting means determines that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable combination member during the predetermined period, the execution restriction of the first movable combination member is limited. The gaming machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2, processing of starting operation of the first movable service member even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable service member in a predetermined period Since the execution of the first movable combination effect in a predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect by false detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary note K3]
When the timing to start the first movable combination effect is the predetermined period, the effect restriction means causes the second movable combination member to receive the second predetermined period after the start of the predetermined period. The game machine according to appendix K2, characterized in that an effect is executed.

[Supplementary note K4]
The gaming machine according to appendix K3, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is the end time of the predetermined period.

[Supplementary note K5]
The gaming machine according to appendix K3, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end time of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendices K3 to K5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable combination member in a predetermined period, the first one occurs when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. 1 The second effect by the movable role member is executed. Therefore, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first period, while preventing the false detection that the operation on the image display means is performed by the operation of the first movable combination product member After the end of the effect, the second effect by the first movable role member, which is generally executed as an effect having a high degree of expectation, can be executed, thereby suppressing a drop in interest or interest in the game.

[Supplementary Note K6]
The effect restriction means restricts the execution of a process for confirming whether it is a timing to start the second effect by the first movable service member in the predetermined period, as described in appendix K1. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix K6, execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is performed by restricting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable combination member in the predetermined period. Can be limited, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Supplementary Note K7]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable part member (39A) is in the second position is the coverage when the second movable part member (39B) is in the fourth position The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K6, which is larger than the coverage of the image display means (341).

[Supplementary Note K8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices K1 to K7, wherein the first movable combination member (39A) and the second movable combination member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect. .

[Appendix L1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (activated position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable part member (39) to be
Effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production restriction means for restricting the execution of one of the first and second effects during an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
The effect limiting means can limit the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period, and the execution period starts before the overlapping period. In this case, it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect in the game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note L1, when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period, the execution of the second effect is restricted, thereby detecting that the object is present in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable service member. It is prevented that the means erroneously detects, and the execution of the first effect is restricted when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, whereby the object is placed in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable service member. It is prevented that the detection means erroneously detects the presence. Therefore, in the case where the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the operation of the movable service member is either when the predetermined period starts first or when the execution period starts first. False detection based on false detection can be prevented, and unnecessary effects of the detection effect can be prevented based on the false detection.

[Appendix L2]
The effect limiting means is configured to detect the detection means (38a) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable part member (39) is operated to when the movable part member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when presence of an object is detected by 〜 38d).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note L2, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted even when the presence of the object is detected by the detecting means, so the first effect is produced by a false detection in the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix L3]
The effect limiting means is configured to detect the detection means (38a to 38) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable part member (39) to when the movable part member (39) returns to the standby position. The gaming machine according to appendix L1, which restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by 38d).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L3, the process of confirming whether the presence of an object is detected by the detection means is not executed in the specific period, so that the execution of the detection effect in the overlapping period can be restricted, so that the processing is simple. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to a false detection.

[Appendix L4]
It further comprises driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable part member (39) between the first position and the second position,
The effect limiting means starts limiting the execution of the first effect during a period from when it is determined that the drive means (39a) is driven to when the drive means (39a) starts to drive. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L3 characterized by

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L4, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the movable combination member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Appendix L5]
When the movable part member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable part member (39) has returned from the first position to the second position It further comprises return detection means (39b),
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable role member (39) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices L1 to L4 characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L5, when the return of the movable combination member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, the erroneous detection in the detection means by the operation of the movable part can be reliably prevented.

[Appendix L6]
When any of the effect limiting means determines that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the effect restricting means restricts the execution of the process to start the second effect, and any one of Appendices L1 to L5 The game machine described in.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note L6, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by restricting the execution of the process to start the second effect. Since the execution of the second effect can be limited, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being performed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix L7]
The game according to any one of Appendices L1 to L5, wherein the effect restriction means restricts execution of processing to confirm whether or not it is a timing to start the movable combination effect effect during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note L7, the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the movable combination production in the reception period can be restricted, so that the execution of the movable combination presentation in the reception period can be limited. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix M1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting an object when it is present in a first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Second detecting means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when it is present in a second predetermined area that is at least partially different from the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) )When,
An object is present in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area based on both the detection result of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the detection result of the second detection means (38C, 38D) First judging means (51) for judging whether or not to
A second determination unit that determines whether an object is present based on one of the first detection unit (38A, 38B) and the second detection unit (38C, 38D) when a specific condition is satisfied (51),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M1, the presence of the object is determined by the first determination means based on the detection results of both the first detection means and the second detection means, but if a specific condition is satisfied, Whether or not an object is present is determined by the second determination means based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, even if a problem may occur by referring to the detection results of both the first detection means and the second detection means, the object's By determining the presence, it is possible to appropriately determine whether an object is present while preventing occurrence of a defect.

[Appendix M2]
It further comprises a movable part member (39) moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) set in the first predetermined area,
The first determination means (51) is used for the first detection means (38C, 38D) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when the movable part member (39) is in the first position. It is determined based on whether or not the presence of an object is detected in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area,
The second determination means (51) is based on the second detection means (38C, 38D) as the specific condition is satisfied when the movable service member (39) is in the second position. The game machine according to appendix M1, wherein it is determined whether or not an object is present in the second predetermined area.

[Appendix M3]
The movable part member (39) is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) when it is moved between the first position and the second position, and the second detection means (38C, The game machine according to appendix M2, which is not detected by 38D).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix M3, when the movable service member is in the second position, the presence or absence of an object in the first predetermined area based on the first detection means is not determined, and based on the second detection means The presence or absence of an object in the second predetermined area is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable combination member from being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player when the movable combination member is in the second position. Further, even when the movable combination member is in operation, it can be determined whether the player has performed a touch operation on the second predetermined area. As a result, it is possible to execute the touch effect based on the touch operation of the player other than the operation area of the movable role member.

[Appendix M4]
The movable part member (39) is moved between the first position and the second position by the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to appendix M2, which is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M4, for example, even when one of the first detection means and the second detection means breaks down when the game is in progress, it can be detected that the movable combination member is in the second position. . In addition, when checking the operation of the movable combination member etc when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is checked that the movable combination member is in the second position only by the detection result of the first detection means. On the contrary to this, it is checked whether the first detection means and the second detection means are broken by checking that the movable combination member is in the second position only by the detection result of the second detection means. It also becomes possible.

[Appendix M5]
It further comprises an effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable role member (39) to execute game effects in the progress of the game,
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect (touch operation effect, alternative touch operation effect) triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the presence of an object in the second predetermined area in a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period) First effect executing means for executing
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable role member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area can be restricted, and the second predetermined period can be restricted. An effect restricting means capable of executing the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the area;
The game machine according to appendix M3, comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M5, when moving between the first position and the second position, the object in the first predetermined area in the execution period of the second effect by the movable service member detected by the first detection means The effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being performed due to the operation of the movable role member being erroneously detected as the touch operation being performed by the player. On the other hand, when an object is present in a second predetermined area outside the detection range of the first detection means, the presence of the object is detected by the second detection means even during the execution period of the second effect. 1 Performed without restriction. Therefore, unnecessary execution of the first effect can be prevented, and the occurrence frequency of the first effect can be suppressed from being extremely reduced, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix M6]
The effect restriction means restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) in the overlapping period, as described in appendix M5. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M6, since the process of confirming whether the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means is not executed in the overlapping period, the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to a false detection by the proper processing.

[Appendix M7]
The effect limiting means is configured to limit the execution of the first effect when the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) in the overlapping period, as described in Appendix M6. Of gaming machines.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix M7, even if the detection means detects the presence of the object, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted, so the first effect is produced by a false detection in the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix M8]
The first effect execution means, when the presence of an object in the second predetermined area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) in the overlapping period, the first effect is the image display means ( Appendix 34. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M5 to M7, characterized in that it is executed in an area corresponding to the second predetermined area in 341).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M8, since the first effect executed by the image display means can be prevented from being restricted, the execution of the first effect by other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp) is restricted As compared with the above, it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in interest due to the execution of the first effect being limited.

[Supplementary Note M9]
It further comprises a second image display means (391B) arranged at a position corresponding to the second predetermined area and different from the first image display means (341),
The first effect execution means sets the second predetermined area in a case where the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect restriction means. When any of the objects is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D), the first effect is executed by the second image display means, in any one of appendices M5 to M8. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M9, in the case where the second image display means is provided, it is possible to prevent the first effect performed by the second image display means from being restricted, so other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp) Compared with the case where the execution of the first effect in the case is limited, it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in interest due to the execution of the first effect being restricted.

[Supplementary Note M10]
The specific condition is detected by one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) to detect the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M9, wherein the gaming machine is in a state in which it is impossible.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix M10, if the first detection means or the second detection means is broken, is the object present based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means? It is judged whether or not. Therefore, even if the first detection unit or the second detection unit has a failure, whether the presence of an object, for example, a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the image display unit is performed by the detection unit that is not broken It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Supplementary Note M11]
The specific condition is that an operation check of the first detection means (38A, 38B) or the second detection means (38C, 38D) is performed, according to any one of the additions M1 to M10. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix M11, when the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means is performed, an object is present based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means It is determined whether or not to. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not one of the first detection means and the second detection means is broken. Here, the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means includes, for example, an operation check performed when the main power is turned on. The operation chuck can also be performed at the time of the progress of the game. For example, when the movable role member is moved to the second position, whether or not the object exists by the second determination means based on the detection result of one of the first detection means and the second detection means By judging, it is also possible to perform an operation check whether one of the first detection means and the second detection means is normally operated. Then, the operation check in the appendix M11 includes not only the operation check performed when the main power is turned on, but also the operation check performed when the game progresses.

10: gaming machine 25: panel 38: detection sensor 38a: upper left detection sensor 38b: lower left detection sensor 38c: upper right detection sensor 38d: lower right detection sensor 38A: first main detection sensor 38B: second main detection sensor 38C: first Sub detection sensor 38D: second sub detection sensor 38E: sub detection sensor 341: symbol display unit 39, 39C: movable combination member 392C: display unit 39A: main movable combination member 392A: display unit 39B: sub movable combination member 391B: display unit 39a: motor 39a1: first motor 39a2: second motor 39b: return detection unit 39c: motor driver 4: main controller 41: MPU
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Game state transition means for transitioning the game state between a notification game state in which a notification game in which a judgment result by the judgment means is notified is executed, and the special game state;
An image display means for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern is variably displayed;
A detection unit for detecting an object when the object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display unit;
A movable service member that is moved between a first position and a second position and detected by the detection means when moved between the first position and the second position;
Effect execution means for causing the image display means and the movable combination member to execute game effects in the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
The first effect executing unit is configured to execute a first effect when the detection unit detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period.
By moving the movable part member from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period, the expectation of the determination result by the determination means being transferred to the special game state is improved. When expectation degree improvement presentation is executed, when existence of the movable combination product member is detected in the predetermined area by the detection unit by the expectation degree improvement presentation being executed, the judgment result by the judgment unit A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a fixed effect which clearly indicates that the game mode is to shift to the special game state.

Images